- 889.50 KB
- 2021-05-10 发布
- 1、本文档由用户上传，淘文库整理发布，可阅读全部内容。
- 2、本文档内容版权归属内容提供方，所产生的收益全部归内容提供方所有。如果您对本文有版权争议，请立即联系网站客服。
- 3、本文档由用户上传，本站不保证质量和数量令人满意，可能有诸多瑕疵，付费之前，请仔细阅读内容确认后进行付费下载。
- 网站客服QQ：403074932
初一年级上学期（7A）
Unit 1---3
重 点 词 组
football field 足球场 World Cup 世界杯
lots of friends 许多朋友 be born 出生
after school 放学后 wake up 醒醒
work hard 努力工作 wear glasses 戴眼镜
love dancing 爱跳舞 football player 足球运动员
badminton court 羽毛球场 swimming pool 游泳池
English club 英语俱乐部 at lunchtime 在午饭时间
take the bus 乘公共汽车 at the weekend 在周末
look happy 看上去高兴 have a good time 过得愉快
do morning exercises 做早操 make model planes 做模型飞机
the sharp teeth 锋利的牙齿 Dragon Boat Festival 端午节
Mid-Autumn Festival 中秋节 Chinese New Year 春节
be good at swimming 擅长游泳 twice a week 一周两次
walk her dog 遛她的狗 at the volleyball court 在排球场
meet up with… 与……约好见面 knock on the door 敲门
cut out 割出（某个形状） have fun 有乐趣
rice dumplings 粽子 play a trick on them 捉弄他们
red packets 红包 take my dog for a walk 带狗去散步
like listening to music 喜欢听音乐 play for 为……踢球
have lessons 上课 have breakfast 吃早饭
in winter 在冬天 listen to the radio 听收音机
on October 1st 在10月1日 at Christmas 在圣诞节
dress up as a ghost 装扮成一个鬼 lion dance 狮子舞
go running for half an hour跑半个小时
spend…(in)doing… 花（时间或金钱）干某事
enjoy playing computer games 喜欢玩电脑游戏
give us some candy as a treat 用一些糖果招待我们
a member of the Swimming Club 游泳俱乐部的一位成员
watch football matches on TV 观看电视里的足球赛
know a lot about computers 知道许多有关电脑（的知识）
on the evening of October 31st 在10月31日的晚上
make lanterns out oranges 用橘子做出灯笼
shine through the eyes 透过眼睛闪烁着
on the other side of the flash card 在幻灯卡的另一面
give them a treat of some candy 用一些糖果招待他们
look forward to something / doing something 期盼某事/ 期盼做某事
语 法 精 讲
1、一般现在时
1）一般现在时的形式
主语为第三人称单数时，需在动词原形后加s或es:
A. 多数动词后面加s。 如 eat—eats, play—plays, swim—swims, walk—walks。
B. 以字母o, s, x, ch, sh 结尾的动词后面加es。
如 do—does, go—goes, guess—guess, fix—fixes, teach—teaches, push—pushes。
C. 末尾为-y的动词分两种情况：
a. 若-y前为辅音字母时，则将-y变为-i，再加-es。
如 study—studies, fly—flies, cry—cries。（-y前分别为辅音字母d, l, r。）
b. 如-y 前为元音字母时，则-y 不变，直接在-y后面加-s。元音字母共五个。它们是a, e, I, o, u。
如 say—says, buy—buys, enjoy—enjoys。（-y前分别为元音字母a, u, o。）
2) 一般现在时所表达的含义
A. 永恒的真理或事实。
The sun comes out from the east. 太阳从东方升起。
Light travels faster than sound. 光速比声速快。
Cats eat fish. 猫吃鱼。
表述“现在时段”。“一般现在时可用以陈述现在时段内发生或存在的事件、动作或情况。这些事件、动作或情景说不定会无限地延续下去。但实际上， 我们的意思则是在说“这是现在存在着的状况”。
My hair is very long. 我的头发很长。
Millie lives in Beijing. Millie住在北京。
His parents work in a supermarket. 他的父母亲在一家超市里工作。
B. 有规律发生的动作
一般现在时可用来表示习惯性动作，也就是指不断重复的事情。这种用法通常可与表示时间的副词或词组伴随使用，如：often, always, usually, sometimes，seldom, every day。
He gets to his company at half past eight every day. 他每天八点半到公司。
Simon always plays football after school. 西蒙放学后经常踢足球。
At the weekend, I usually go running for half an hour. 周末我通常跑步半小时。
Sometimes my mother flies a kite with me in the park.
有时我妈妈和我在公园里放风筝。
2．人称代词和物主代词
1）人称代词
A. 人称代词分为主格和宾格两种形式。如果是作句子主语成分的人称代词就必须使用主格形式；如果是作句子宾语成分的人称代词就必须使用宾格形式。还有，在介词后面必须使用宾格形式。
如：She likes her dog. She often walks him. 她喜欢她的狗。她经常带他遛遛。（she是主格，him是宾格。）
Where are they? I can’t find them. 他们在哪里？我找不到他们。（they、I是主格, them是宾格）
Don’t worry about me! I can look after it well. 别为我担心。我可以照看好它的。（about和after是介词，me和it是宾格。）
B. 习惯顺序
如果主语是几个并列的人称代词时，习惯顺序是：we, you and they；you, he / she and I。
You, he and I are classmates. 你、我、他是同班同学。
C. 中性代词it的用法
It除了可指代动物、事物外，还可以指时间、天气、距离或温度。
如：I have a lovely cat. I like it very much. 我有一只可爱的猫。我非常喜欢它。（it指动物）
English is very useful. It is my favourite subject. 英语很有用。它是我最喜爱的学科。（it指事物）
It is about five kilometers from here. 离这儿大约五公里。（it指距离）
It’s 9:00pm. I must go. 现在晚上九点了。我必须走了。（it指时间）
How windy it is today! 今天风多大啊！（it指天气）
另外，it也可用于以下情况之中：
弄不清婴儿或小孩性别时：What a lovely baby it is! 多么可爱的宝宝啊！
看不见对方时：--- There’s a knock on the door. Go and see who it is. --- It’s Jim.
--- 有人敲门。去看看是谁。 --- 是吉姆。
（ring!）--- Hello! Who is it? --- It’s Mary speaking. ---喂，谁呀？---是玛莉。
照片或图片中的人物：--- Who’s the little boy? --- It’s me. 那小男孩是谁？--- 是我。
2）物主代词
物主代词可分为形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词两种形式。形容词性物主代词具有形容词的作用，只能作定语，后面必须要跟上一个名词；而名词性物主代词则具有名词的作用，可在句中作主语、表语或宾语。换言之，名词性物主代词=形容词性物主代词+名词。
如：The red one is her car. Mine is the blue one. 红色的那辆是她的车。我的是那辆兰色的。（mine = my car, 且在句中作主语。）
I don’t want their answers. Tell me yours. 我不要他们的答案。告诉我你的答案。
（yours = your answer, 且在句中作宾语。）
3. Some dogs just don’t know how to have fun. 一些狗就是不懂怎么玩。
1）在此句中“how to have fun” 是know的宾语。“疑问词+to do”形“所表达的含义相当于一个名词，因此，它可充当句子的主语成分或是宾语成分。
如：Where to look for the lost boy is still a big problem now. （作主语）
去哪里找那个失踪的男孩仍是个大问题。
We are talking about which book to buy first. (作宾语) 我们在谈论先买哪本书。
2）“have fun”的“思是“嬉戏”、“娱乐”。“un 是不可数名词，也可作定语，意为“有趣”、“逗笑”。“： We had lots of fun at the party today! 我们今天在聚会上玩得很开心！
It is a fun hat. 它是顶可笑的帽子。
4．My favourite lessons are Chinese and English.我最喜欢的课程是语文和英语。
Favourite 是形容词，意为“最喜欢的”。“可以和“like……best”的形式替换。
如：What’s his favourite colour? His favourite colour is blue. 可转换为
What colour does he like best? He likes blue best. 他最喜欢什么颜色？他最喜欢兰色。
5. Millie goes to the Reading Club twice a week. 米莉一星期去读书会两次。
twice a week 意思是“一周两次”。“是用来表示“频率”的“语，其中，twice 表示“两次、两倍”，“once 表示“一次、一倍”，“次或三倍以上用time表示。
如：Please take the pills three times a day. 请一天服用三次这种药丸。
How often do they go back to their hometown? Once a year.
他们多久回一次家乡？一年一次。
Now my schoolbag is twice as heavy as it was. 现在我的书包的重量是以前的两倍。
6．He teaches us English. 他教我们英语。
teach somebody something 意思是“教某人某事”；“teach somebody to do something 意思是“教某人干某事”。“中的somebody是宾格形式，不是形容词性物主代词。
如：The man under the tree teaches them P.E. 树下的那个人教他们体育。
Could you teach me to drive a car? 你能教我开车吗？
7．Do you have any money? No, I don’t have any money.
你有钱吗？不，我没钱。
在否定句中，some要改为any；在问句中，some通常也要改为any。但如果当提问者期待他的问题能得到肯定答案时，问句中的some不需改成any。
如：Are there any eggs in the basket? Yes, there are some. 篮子里有鸡蛋吗？是的，有一些。
I only bought some drinks. I don’t buy any food. 我只买了些饮料，没买食物。
Would you like some snacks? Yes, please. 你要些小吃吗？好的。（提问者希望对方接受他的建议。）
Could you give me some paper? 你能给我一些纸吗？（提问者希望对方给他纸。）
8．Every day except Monday. 除了星期一，每天（都开放）。
except 意思是“除了……之外”，“介词。
如：Everyone except me goes to school by bike. 除了我之外，所有的人都是骑车上学的。
We can see all the colures in this picture except grey. 除了灰色，我们能在这幅画里看到所有的颜色。
另外，except和besides虽都解释为“除了……之外”，“except是将紧跟其后的宾语“排除在外”，“besides则将宾语内容“包含在内”。“ 如：We all have finished homework except him. 除了他之外，我们都已经完成了回家作业。（他还没有完成。）
We all have finished homework besides him. 除了他以外，我们大家也已经完成了回家作业。（他也完成了。）
9．Thank you for organizing the class trip. 谢谢你组织这次班级旅行。
Thank somebody for doing something 意思是“感谢某人做某事”。“词for后的动词要使用-ing形式。
如：Thank you for showing me the way to school. 谢谢你指给我看去学校的路。
其实，跟在介词后面的动词都必须使用-ing形式。
如：Nick is good at singing.尼克擅长唱歌。 It’s time for playing games. 到做游戏的时候了。
I spent five minutes in drawing a dog. 我花了5分钟画了只狗。
The kids look forward to eating ice cream. 孩子们盼望着吃冰激凌。
You can drink it without getting fat. 你喝了它不会发胖。
10．We would like to go to Beijing Zoo in Xicheng District.
我们想去西城区的北京动物园。
would like something 意思是“想要某物”，““want something”；“ould like to do something意思是“想要干某事”，““want to do something”。“如：I would like a cup of tea. = I want a cup of tea. 我想要杯茶。
Would you like to go with me? = Do you want to go with me? 你想和我一起去吗？
注意：would like to do something 与 like doing / like to do something (喜欢干某事)不要混淆。
如：I’d like to watch English movies. 我想要看英语影片。
I like to watch English movies. 我喜欢看英语影片。
11．I’m going to see the doctor at three o’clock in the afternoon on 12th October.
我打算10月12日下午3点去看医生。
时间表达法有多种，不同的时间搭配的介词也各不相同。如下表所示：
at
确切的时刻（0:00）
at 10 o’clock , at four thirty
用餐时间
at lunchtime, at coffee time, at dinner time
节日
at Christmas, at Halloween
年龄
at 16, at the age of 35
其它时刻
at noon, at night, at midnight， at the weekend
on
具体到以“天”计“的时间
on Sunday, on Friday afternoon, on October 4th, on your birthday, on Christmas Day, on that evening, on the evening of July 1st, on a cold morning
in
泛指一天中的某个时段
in the morning, in the afternoon, in the evening
月份、年份、季节、世纪
in May, in winter, in 2005, in the 21st century,
一段时间
in five minutes, in ten days, in three weeks,
12．What do you think of your new school? 你认为你的新学校怎么样？
What…think of … 意思是“认为……怎么样？”相“的表达方式还有“How…like…”。“如：What do you think of her new novel? 你认为她的新小说怎么样？
How do you like my new dress? 你认为我的新裙子怎么样？
注意：What…think of… 虽解释为“认为……怎么样？”，“疑问词是what，而不是how。
13．Could you tell me the answer to number two? 你能告诉我第二题的答案吗？
the answer to… 的意思是“……的答案”。“词to的含义是“的”，“用介词of。类似的短语还有the key to … ……钥匙；the way to … 去……的路；the ticket to … ……的票。
14. Is it time for breakfast? 是吃早饭的时间了吗？
It’s my first time to see it and I am very excited.
这是我第一次见到，我很兴奋。
It is time for something / It is time to do something 意为 “是做某事的时候了”。“ It is time for somebody to do something. 意为“是某人该干某事的时候了”。“ Is it time for
breakfast? 也可转换成 Is it time for having breakfast? 或Is it time to have breakfast?
如：It is time to play tennis. 可转换成 It is time for tennis. 或 It is time for playing tennis.
It is time for us to play tennis. 到我们打网球的时候了。
It’s time for me to change now. 是我该改变的时候了。
而It is one’s first/second time to do something 意为“是某人第几次干某事了。”
“：It’s my first time to see it. 这是我第一次看见它。
It is his third time to make the same mistake. 这是他第三次犯同样的错误了。
15．Can I borrow your pen? 我能借你的钢笔吗？
borrow意为“借进……”，“用的短语是borrow ..from … ；lend 意为“借出……”，“用的短语是lend … to …。
如：My friend borrowed a book from the library yesterday. 昨天我朋友从图书馆里借了本书。（对于主语my friend来说是借进。）
Could you lend some money to me? = Could you lend me some money? 你能借我些钱吗？（对于主语you来说是借出。）
16. I’m dressing up as a ghost. 我正在装扮成一个鬼。
dress up as … 的意思是“乔装打扮成……”；“ress up in … 的意思是“用……乔装打扮”；“ress somebody 的意思是“给某人穿衣服”；“ress oneself 的意思是“自己穿衣服”。“ 如：I’ll dress up as Monkey King. 我要装扮成猴王。
She dressed up in red / red clothes this Tuesday. 本周二她穿了红衣服。
She has to dress her baby every morning. 她不得不每天早晨给她的宝宝穿衣服。
Look! Kate can dress herself now. 瞧！现在凯特可以自己穿衣服了。
17．Usually, they give us some candy as a treat. 通常他们用糖果招待我们。
The neighbours usually give them a treat of some candy.
邻居通常用糖果招待他们。
give somebody something as a treat与give somebody a treat of something都解释为“用某物招待某人”。“此,“they give us some candy as treat.”等“于“they give us of a treat of some candy.”。“此外，as也有许多含义：好像（某人）；当作、作为；作为（某种身份）；当……的时候；由于；按照；as … as … 意为“和……一样”。“如：He dressed as a policeman. 他穿得像个警察。
I treat her as my good friend. 我把她当作好朋友。
As a student, you should get to school on time. 作为一名学生，你应该按时到校。
We watched TV as he cooked dinner. 他烧饭的时候，我们在看电视。
As they were very hungry, they ate up all the food very soon. 由于很饿，他们很快吃光了所有的食物。
Do it as the teacher says. 按照老师说的做。
The boy is as tall as his father. 那男孩和他的父亲一样高。
I found the same book as hers. 我找到了和她的（书）一样的书。
典 例 解 析
1．_________ your mother at home now?
A. Does B. Do C. Is D. Are
2．He is not a good boy. He often _____________ his homework.
A. doesn’t B. don’t does C. don’t do D. doesn’t do
3．--- Can I _____________ your dictionary?
--- Sorry, I’m using it. I can’t _____________ it to you.
A. lend, lend B. borrow, lend C. borrow, borrow D. lend, borrow
4．--- _________ the boys enjoy _________ the World Cup? --- Yes, they __________.
A. Does, watching; does B. Do, watch; do C. Do, watching; do D. Do, to watch; do
5．Nick hopes he can meet all ____________ classmates in Beijing Zoo.
A. the other B. the others C. other D. another
首先要弄清这四个答案的区别：the other可以指“两者中的另一个”，“成句型“one…, the other….”，也可后接名词的复数形式，意为“其余的/剩余的一些……”；“he others中的“others”是代词，后面不可再接名词；other的意思是“其他的，另外的”，“面必须接名词才构成有意义的短语，other前没有the, 也就没有范围限制；another的意思是“另一个”，“面可接名词（通常接名词的单数形式。若接名词的复数形式，则将这个复数形式看作一个整体。），也可直接作代词使用。因而，答案B与D可先排除了。然后要知道all后接名词时通常要在此名词前加上定冠词the。故答案应选A。
6．--- May I drink ___________ tea? --- Sorry, I don’t have ____________.
A. any, some B. some, any C. some, some D. any, any
7．I’m going to visit the palace __________________ a warm afternoon.
A. in B. at C. for D. on
8．Will you ____________ 100 yuan on this kind of toy?
A. spend B. pay C. cost D. take
解析：答案选A。
句意为“你会花100元买这种玩具吗？”spend、pay、cost都可解释为“花钱”，“take则通常用于“花时间”。“么，spend的搭配是“spend … (in) doing something”或“spend … on something”,“语为“人”；“ay的搭配是“pay … for something”，主语为“人”;“ost的搭配是“cost somebody …”，主语为“物”。“中有个介词“on”，“与其搭配的只有spend，因此，答案应选A。
9．Great! It’s time to _______ up with John and Amy. I’m looking forward to _______ them soon.
A. meet, see B. meeting, seeing C. meeting, see D. meet, seeing
10．--- Is this _________ pen? --- No, _______ doesn’t have a blue pen. _________ is purple.
A. she, her, hers B. hers, she, her C. her, hers, she D. her, she, hers
综 合 练 习 （A）
笔 试 部 分
III. 单项选择 (15%)
（ ）1. ---_____________ are they? --- They are fine.
A. Where B. What C. Who D. How
（ ）2. --- Are you __________? --- No, I am ________________.
A. an English; an American B. English; American
C. an English; American D. English; a American
（ ）3. __________ there a book and some pictures on the desk?
A. Is B. Are C. Have D. Has
（ ）4. My grandpa is 65. But he ____________ young.
A. look B. looks C. are D. /
（ ）5. My cousin ______________ with me on Sunday.
A. likes play B. enjoys playing C. like playing D. enjoys to play
（ ）6. Are they good at ____________?
A. draw B. to draw C. draws D. drawing
（ ）7. Her aunt has _______________.
A. small mouth B. a long hair C. a big eye D. a big nose
（ ）8. My mother ______________ our games but my father ____________ them.
A. don’t watch , watch B. doesn’t watch, watch
C. doesn’t watch, watchs D. doesn’t watch, watches
（ ）9. The little dog ________ born in our house.
A. is B. are C. was D. does
（ ）10. It’s time _______ a rest.
A. for B. to C. of D. with
（ ）11．---What colour ___________ Miss. White’s jeans? --- ____________ dark blue.
A. are, It’s B. is, It is C. are, They are D. is, They are
（ ）12. --- __________ is this skirt? --- It’s my sister’s.
A. Who’s B. What C. Which D. Whose
（ ）13. Kitty goes to see her uncle _________ every Friday evening.
A. / B. on C. in D. at
（ ）14. There isn’t _______________ in the basket.
A. some bread B. any tea C. a meat D. any pears
（ ）15. Thank you for ______________ me about it.
A. tell B. to tell C. telling D. told
IV. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (5%)
1. How old are those lovely ____________ (baby)?
2. Oh, yes, Ben ____________ (study) in our school.
1. I think the twins love _____________(eat) Chinese food.
2. Do the students always write __________ (good)? Yes, they do.
3. Look! __________ their daughter at the door (be)?
V. 句型转换 (5%)
1. Joanna often does some cleaning on Sunday. (改为否定句)
________________________________________________________________
2. The boys don’t have any erasers. (改为单数形式)
________________________________________________________________
3. The student in the front row is a top student. (划线部分提问)
________________________________________________________________
4. He doesn’t have a watch. (改为复数形式)
________________________________________________________________
5. My grandmother gave me a treat of some chocolates yesterday. (同义句转换)
________________________________________________________________
VI. 根据上下文意思，正确翻译括号内所给的中文 (10%)
The __________ (发明) of the camera goes far into the ___________ (过去). In the 1500s, men were experimenting with cameras that made images. But it was not ___________ (直到) the early 1800s that man ___________ (发现) a way to make the pictures permanent. __________ (甚至) then, photography was a new ____________ (领域). Most _________ (家庭) had their pictures __________ (拍) by a photographer. People did not own cameras ____________ (因为) taking pictures and developing the film were too _____________ (困难).
VII. 完成下列句子 (15%)
1. Daniel戴了副眼镜，但他很擅长打电脑游戏。
_______________________________________________________________
2. 每天晚上他读英语15分钟吗？
_______________________________________________________________
3. 我的新同学对我都很好。
_______________________________________________________________
4. 在学校我们一周做两次早操。
_______________________________________________________________
5. 你们打算怎样庆祝圣诞？
_______________________________________________________________
VIII. 完型填空 (10%)
This Chinese boy is Li Lei. He is twelve. He is ___1___ No. 1 High School. He’s in Class Two, Grade One. ___2___ good friend is Jack. He’s ___3___ English boy. He’s in Li Lei’s class. ___4___ in the same row. ___5____ Read is their English ___6___ in their class now. She’s a pretty woman. Jack and Li Lei have a ___7___ ------ Jack is their English teacher’s ___8___. Li Lei always goes to Jack’s home ___9___ school. But he calls Jack’s mother ___10___ Read.
( ) 1. A. on B. to C. in D. of
( ) 2. A. He’s B. His C. Him D. He
( ) 3. A. an B. a C. the D. /
( ) 4. A. They B. Their C. They’re D. Theirs
( ) 5. A. Mr. B. Miss C. Sir D. Mrs.
( ) 6. A. friend B. doctor C. classmate D. teacher
( ) 7. A. dog B. friend C. book D. secret
( ) 8. A. daughter B. son C. sister D. brother
( ) 9. A. after B. at C. in D. to
( )10.A. Mr. B. Miss C. Aunt D. Uncle
IX. 阅读理解 (20%)
( A )
Lucy and Lily are twins. They are students. They are ten. Their father is Mr. White. He is in a red coat. Their mother is Mrs. White. She is in black shoes. Lucy is in a yellow sweater. Lily is in a red sweater. Bob is their brother. He is in a blue hat. Peter is his good friend. The twins and Peter are in a green car. The car is behind the red flowers.
( ) 1. Mr. White is ______________.
A. Lucy’s uncle B. Bob’s father C. Lily’s teacher D. a teacher
( ) 2. Mr. White and Mrs. White have ___________ .
A. one son and two daughters B. one son and one daughter
C. one daughter and two sons D. two sons and two daughters.
( ) 3. Mrs. White is _______________.
A. in a yellow sweater B. in black shoes C. in a blue hat D. in a red coat
( ) 4. _____________ isn’t in the green car.
A. Bob B. Lucy C. Lily D. Peter
( ) 5. Who’s in red? _______________.
A. Mrs. White and Mr. White B. The twins
C. Bob and Lily D. Lily and Mr. White
(B)
One day, Tim goes home from school and says to Mother Cat, “Please take your children to the park near here. You can play there. But don’t forget there are five cats in the park.”
Mother Cat is very glad. She takes her four children to the park soon. Now they are playing happily.
Mother Cat is counting the number of the cats, “one, two, three, four …” Mother Cat is worried (着急). “There are five cats here. But now there are only four cats. What can I do?”
Mother Cat is crying (哭). She is looking for the fifth cat. “Where is it?” Oh dear! Where is the fifth cat?
( ) 6. Mother Cat has ____________ children.
A. 2 B. 3 C. 4 D. 5
( ) 7. Tim ________________.
A. goes to the park with the cats B. lives near the park
C. has four cats D. a doctor
( ) 8. Mother Cat is crying because (因为) ________________.
A. she can’t the fifth cat. B. she can’t find home.
C. Her children are not in the park. D. she forgets the time to go home
( ) 9. The fifth cat is _______________.
A. in the river B. at home C. Tim D. Mother Cat
( ) 10. Which one is WRONG?
A. The cats are playing happily in the park.
B. Mother Cat can count the numbers.
C. The cats goes to the park when Tim is at school.
D. Mother Cat is looking for the fifth cat.
X. 书面表达（15%）
写一篇短文介绍一次你亲身经历的活动——秋游。字数在60-80之间。
要点如下：1. 11月3日早上7：30出发，乘公共汽车去。
2．一个半小时后先到了“阳光公园” ，大家划船，吃午饭。然后，去了“城市动物园”。有各种动物。可以和熊猫合影，给熊猫喂食。
3．下午4：30返校。有点累，但过得很愉快。
综 合 练 习 （B）
IV. 单项选择（15%）
( ) 1. Don’t miss __________ “n” in the word “running”.
A. a B. the C. / D. an
( ) 2. There __________ some milk and some biscuits on the table.
A. are B. is C. has D. have
( ) 3. Uncle Green ___________ Chinese tea.
A. like drinking B. like drinks C. likes drinking D. likes drink
( ) 4. Do you know all those _________________?
A. woman teachers B. men workers C. women teacher D. man workers
( ) 5. Would you like _____________ to drink?
A. buying something B. to buy something
C. buying anything D. to buy anything
( ) 6. Does Mr. Lu teach ____________ Art?
A. your B. hers C. him D. they
( ) 7. What did the Blacks do before _____________ to the airport?
A. they start B. starting C. started D. they starting
( ) 8. How much did you ______________ on the new digital camera?
A. spend B. cost C pay D. take
( ) 9. Peter and I ____________ football.
A. all love B. love all C. both love D. love both
( )10. __________ do you think of my new car?
A. How B. Which C. How much D. What
( )11. In China, some people like the KFC, some like Pizza Hut, and _______ like McDonalds.
A. other B. the other C. others D. the others
( )12. Have you seen the key ________ my bike? I can’t find it.
A. of B. to C. for D. with
( )13. Please ask ___________. He may know which one is __________.
A. he, your B. him, yours C. his, you D. him, your
( )14. I’m going to meet him _____ 3:00 ________ the afternoon ___________ July 5th.
A. at, in, on B. in, on, at C. on, at, in D. at, on, in
( ) 15. __________ the exciting evening, everyone laughed and shouted loudly.
A. At B. In C. On D. For
V. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (5%)
1. I like to play with _____________ (they).
2. Is this ____________ (she) book? It looks like ___________ (she).
3. Let’s ___________ (sing) this song together.
4. We usually have a party on the ___________ (two) of October.
VI. 句型转换 (5%)
1. The girl behind you is his sister. (改为一般疑问句)
________________________________________________________________
2. My friends rush into the classroom. (改为单数形式)
________________________________________________________________
3. I like talking to my classmates at lunchtime. (划线部分提问)
________________________________________________________________
4. It takes me about two hours a day to do my homework. (同义句转换)
________________________________________________________________
5. My favourite sport is volleyball. (同义句转换)
_______________________________________________________________
VII. 根据上下文意思，正确翻译括号内所给的中文 (10%)
Everybody ________ (有) his own hobbies: some are fond of collecting ___________ (邮票), coins, etc., some like _____________ (游泳), and there are some who like reading or music--- all these are good hobbies. The __________ (最糟糕的) hobbies of all are smoking and gambling (赌博). Smoking _____________ (危害) our ___________ (身体). Some men like to smoke in ___________ (公共的) places, and don’t ___________ (在意) about other people’s feelings. Gambling will make you lost everything. You may lose your ____________ (脾气), money and friendship. Friendship is the thing that money can’t buy. To lose a friend is easy but to ___________ (建立) up a friendship is hard.
VIII. 完成下列句子 (15%)
1. 那个树底下的女孩又高又苗条。她是位有礼貌的学生。
__________________________________________________________________________
2. 在12月24日的晚上你们干什么了？我们举行了聚会。
__________________________________________________________________________
3. 每个周末，他总是画一个多小时的画。
__________________________________________________________________________
4. 你的表弟是不是知道许多有关外国节日的事情？
__________________________________________________________________________
５. 孩子们盼望着装扮成各种动物。
___________________________________________________________________________
IX. 完型填空 (10%)
Little Chad was a shy, __1__ young man. One day he came home and told his mother that he would like to make a present __2__ everyone in his class. Her heart sank (下沉). She thought, “I wish he wouldn’t do that!” __3__ she had watched the children when they walked home from school, her Chad was always behind them. They laughed and talked to each other. But Chad was never included. However, she still decided she __4__ Chad the paper and glue. For three weeks, night after night, Chad finally made 35 presents. He was __5__ and carefully put them in a bag.
The next morning, Chad went to school __6__. Later in the afternoon, when she heard the children outside, mom looked out of the window. And, as usual, Chad was the __7__ one. He walked a little __8__ than usual. His bag was __9__, she noticed, and when the door opened, she said, “Mommy has some cookies and milk for you.”
But he __10__ heard her words. He just walked in. His face was red, and all he could say was: “Not a one. Not a one.” Her heart sank. And then he added, “I didn’t forget a one, not a single one!”
( ) 1. A. quiet B. lucky C. noisy D. angry
( ) 2. A. to B. with C. for D. by
( ) 3. A. If B. Because C. Though D. But
( ) 4. A. bought B. will buy C. would buy D. buys
( ) 5. A. exciting B. excited C. boring D. bored
( ) 6. A .suddenly B. sadly C. in hurry D. in a hurry
( ) 7. A. first B. happiest C. shortest D. last
( ) 8. A. fast B. faster C. fastest D. slowly
( ) 9. A. broken B. full C. dirty D. empty
( )10. A. didn’t B. couldn’t C. hardly D. almost
X. 阅读理解 (20%)
（A）
One day Einstein is walking in a street in New York. His friend meets him and says to him, “Einstein, you should buy anew coat. Look, your coat is very old.”
But Einstein answers, “It doesn’t matter. Nobody knows me here.”
After a few years, Einstein becomes a famous scientist(科学家). But he still wears the old coat.
His friend meets him again and asks him to buy a new one.
But Einstein says, “I don’t need to buy a new one. Everyone knows me here.”
( )1. Einstein lived in ________.
A. England B. China C. America D. Japan
( )2.Einstein’s coat is very old. His friend ______________.
A. gives him a new one B. asks him to buy a new one
C. helps him buy anew one D. helps him mend the old one
( )3. Einstein doesn’t want to buy a new one because ____________.
A. nobody knows him B. he likes the old one
C. he has no money D. he isn’t interested in his clothes
( )4.Some years later Einstein _________.
A. buys a new one B. becomes a great scientist
C. still wears the old coat D. Both B and C
( )5.The title of the story should be ___________.
A. Einstein and His Friend B. Einstein and His Old Coat
C. A Famous Scientist--- Einstein D. A Day of Einstein
（B）
Many people have dogs or cats as pets. Mr. Jenkins wanted a different kind of pet, so he bought a lion!
The first night, Mr. Jenkins put the lion in a bedroom and locked the door. The next morning he went to look at his new pet. The lion had broken the bed, eaten a blanket, torn the rug, and chewed a chair.
Mr. Jenkins sold the lion and bought a puppy. He said, “A puppy is a better pet to have in a house. Lions belong in zoos.”
( ) 6. Which of the following is Mr. Jenkins’ new pet?
A. a cat B. a dog C. a lion D. a pig
( ) 7. Mr. Jenkins put his pet in a _________.
A. kitchen B. cage C. garage D. bedroom
( ) 8. Mr. Jenkins kept his pet ___________.
A. for a short time B. for many years C. in his car D. to scare people
( ) 9. The story says that the pet __________.
A. ate the bed B. tore the rug C. hid a table D. bit Mr. Jenkins
( )10. The best title is ______________.
A. A Puppy That Chased a Lion B. Lions Are Not Good Pets
C. Building a New House D. A Lion Runs Away
Unit 4---6
重 点 词 组
need a lot of energy 需要大量的能量 want to be a dancer 想要成为一名舞蹈家
a healthy diet 健康的饮食 keep fit 保持健康
a top student 顶尖学生 do some exercise 进行运动
be careful with her diet 当心她的饮食 pocket money 零花钱
give advice on … 在……给建议/ 忠告 free time 闲暇时间
five cartons of milk 五纸盒牛奶 a poor area 贫困地区
a packet of salt 一袋盐 how often 多久一次
how long 多久 not…any more 再也不……
lie on the couch 躺在长沙发上 much better 好多了
so many bananas 如此多的香蕉 stay healthy 保持健康
ask… for help 向……寻求帮助 music box 音乐盒
take a look 看一看 ask…to do… 叫某人干某事
many kinds of 各种各样的 never mind 没关系
the same…as… 和……一样 show around 四处看看
electrical shop 电器商店 sports shop 体育商店
flower shop 花店 shoe shop 鞋店
invite somebody to… 邀请某人到…… wait for one’s turn 等着轮到某人
clothes shop 服装商店 stay out 不回家、呆在户外
top floor 顶楼 a fashion show 时装表演
look colourful 看上去色彩丰富 long red leather boots 红色长统皮靴
dress up in white trousers穿白裤子 just a minute 稍等片刻
choose what to wear 选择穿什么 make my feet feel hot 使我的脚感到热
be made of 用……做成 fast food 快餐
spend… on something 在某物身上花（时间或金钱）
wear her hair in a 1990s style 把她的头发扎成20世纪90年代的样式
raise money for Project Hope 为希望工程筹款
语 法 精 讲
1．You never exercise. 你从来不锻炼。I never do any exercise. 我从来不锻炼。
Do you do morning exercises at school? 你们在学校做早操吗？（Unit 2）
exercise有动词和名词两种词性。作为动词时，exercise解释为“锻炼”；“为名词时，exercise解释为“锻炼”（“时，exercise是不可数名词）或“练习”（“时，exercise是可数名词）。
如：do morning exercises做早操 ; do eye exercises做眼保健操; do Math exercises做数学练习
How often do you exercise? 你多久锻炼一次？
You must take more exercise. 你必须都进行运动。
2．It’s very easy for me to get tired when I dance. 当我跳舞时，我很容易疲劳。
It is + 形容词 + (for somebody） )o do something 的意思是“对某人来说干某时很……”。“如：It is a little difficult for the boy to work out the problem.
对那男孩来说，要解出那题目有点困难。
It is very happy (for me) to make friends with you. （对我来说），很高兴和你成为朋友。
It is important for everyone to keep healthy. 对每个人来说，保持健康很重要。
另外，when引导的是时间状语从句，意思是“当……的时候”。“当注意的是时间状语从句中，无将来时态。如果要表达一般将来时态或过去将来时态的含义，从句中需用一般现在时态或一般过去时态代替，而主句的时态不受影响。
如：Please give it to your teacher when you get to school tomorrow.
Will you please buy some juice for me when you go to the shop after school?
I wondered what he would say when he met his wife.
3．I need to keep fit. 我需要保持健康。
need to do something的意思是“需要干某事”，“时的need是实意动词；need do something的意思是“需要干某事”，“干某事是必要的，此时的need是情态动词。
如：Do they need to take off their shoes? No, they don’t. 他们需要脱鞋吗？不，不必了。
You need think it over again before you do it. 在你做之前，你有必要在考虑一下。
Must I clean the office at once? No, you needn’t. 我必须立刻打扫办公室吗？不，你不必。
4．How beautiful Sandy is! 桑迪是多么漂亮！
“How + 形容词/ 副词 + 主语 + 谓语 + 其它成分 + ！”构“感叹句。感叹句还有一个常用形式是“What + 名词短语（通常含形容词）+ 主语 + 谓语 + 其它成分 + ！”。“们的意思均为“某物或某人多么……啊！”。“如：How sunny the weather is today! 今天的天气多晴朗啊！
How carefully the boy is writing on the blackboard! 那个男孩在黑板上写得多认真啊！
What a sunny day it is today! 今天的天气多晴朗啊！
What tall buildings they are! = How tall the buildings are! 多么高的楼房啊！
5．I don’t eat them any more. 我再也不吃它们了。
not … any more的意思是“再也不……”，“可转换成“no more”。“似的表达方式还有：not … any longer = no longer。
如：I don’t eat them any more. = I no more eat them.
The baby didn’t cry any more. = The baby no more cried. 那宝宝再也不哭了。
You are no longer a child. = You are not a child any longer. 你再也不是个孩子了。
The famous doctor didn’t live in this town any longer.
= The famous doctor no longer lived in this town.那位著名的医生再也不住在这个镇上了。
6．I feel much better now. 我感觉好多了。
“much + 比较级”的“思是“……多了”。“如：much older 老多了； much heavier 重多了； much more expensive 贵多了；
另外，可用于修饰比较级的副词还有：even, far, any及短语a little（a little后也可跟原形）。
如：His father is even fatter than him. 他的父亲甚至比他还胖。
This story is far more interesting than that one. 这个故事比那个有趣得多了。
I can’t run any faster. 我再也跑不快了。
Did you get to school a little earlier today? 你今天到学校早点了吗？
7．名词
1）专有名词
专有名词是指特定的人、地方、事物或概念，而这些人、地方、事物或概念实际上被认为是独一无二。专有名词开头字母要大写，前面一般不用冠词。
如：人名：Tom、Mr. Smith 称呼：Dad、Uncle Li、Granny
地名： Oxford Street、Queen Road 地理名称：America、Tokyo、Africa
月份、星期、节日和季节：October、Tuesday、Christmas、spring (一般小写，也可大写)
可在前面加上冠词the的专有名词：the Great Wall、the Thames、the U.S.A.、the P.R.C.。
2）普通名词
普通名词可分为可数名词和不可数名词。可数名词有单数和复数形式之分；不可数名词没有单数或复数形式。
A．可数名词的变化如下表所示：
可数名词
单数
发音以元音开头的名词
an orange, an umbrella, an hour, an “L”
发音以辅音开头的名词
a book, a house, a university, a uniform
复数
加-s
books, sweaters, boys, days, radios, photos, Americans, Germans, pianos, months
以-s, -x, -sh, -ch及某些-o结尾的单词后加-es
watches, matches, boxes, buses, dishes, potatoes, tomatoes, classes
变y为i，再加-es
factory—factories, story—stories, study—studies
变f或fe为v,再加-es
shelf—shelves, wife—wives, half—halves
不规则 变化
变man为men
woman—women, postman—postmen,
policeman—policemen, Frenchman—Frenchmen
单、复数同形
sheep—sheep, Chinese—Chinese,
Japanese—Japanese, deer—deer
其它变化
tooth—teeth, foot—feet, child—children,
mouse—mice, ox—oxen
注意：带有性别的一些名词短语的复数形式的变化。如，a woman doctor --- women doctors, a man worker --- men workers。
B．不可数名词的量一般借助量词来表示。凡是量词都是可数名词，因此需表明量词的单、复数情况。
如：two pieces of bread 二片面包 a box of tea 一盒茶叶
five cartons of milk 五纸盒牛奶 three bottles of water 三瓶水
a glass of juice 一玻璃杯果汁 ten bars of chocolate 十块巧克力
8．There be句型与have / has
1）There be 结构表示“某地存在着某人或某物”；“ave / has表示“某人或动物拥有某人或某物”。“如：There is a nice skirt on the bed. 床上有一条好看的短裙。
Lucy has a nice skirt. 露茜有一条好看的短裙。
Are there any basketballs in your school? 你们学校里有篮球吗？
Do you have any basketballs? 你有篮球吗？
2）就近原则
There be结构要遵循就近原则。
如：There is a book and some pens on the desk. 在课桌上有一本书和一些钢笔。
There are some pens and a book on the desk. 在课桌上有一些钢笔和一本书。
9．I think you can buy him a football. 我想你可以买只足球给他。
I can buy a yo-yo for him. 我可以买个溜溜球给他。
buy somebody something相当于buy something for somebody, 意思是“买某物给某人”。“如：My best friend bought me some CDs as my birthday presents. = My best friend bought some CDs for me as my birthday presents. 我的好朋友买了一些CD给我作为我的生日礼物。
The students are going to buy their teachers some flowers. = The students are going to buy some flowers for their teachers. 同学们打算给他们的老师们买写花。
10．The shopkeeper asks Amy to buy a CD for her friend.
店主叫艾米买张CD给她的朋友。
ask somebody to do something的意思是“叫／要求某人做某事”。“似的短语还有：tell somebody to do something “告诉某人干某事”。“如：Why do you always ask me to do the same thing? 你为何总叫我做同样的事？
Tell all your classmates to wait here. 告诉你所有的同班同学在这儿等着。
11．现在进行时
1）现在进行时所表达的含义
A. 现在正在发生或进行的事件或动作。常用的时间状语有：now, at the moment。
如：What are they doing? They are drinking milk. 他们正在干嘛？他们正在喝牛奶。
Is the little monkey climbing the tree now? 现在那只小猴子在爬树吗？
B. 目前一段时期的活动或现在一阶段正在进行的动作。
如：The Brown family is traveling around the world these days.
这几天布郎一家正在环球旅行。
Are you learning to drive all the time? 你一直在学开车吗？
C. 有些动词的现在进行时可表达将要发生的动作，一般后接时间状语。如：come、 go、leave、arrive、begin、start等。
如：When are we leaving? 我们什么时候出发？
John is arriving here in ten minutes. 约翰十分钟后到这儿。
She isn’t coming to meet you until five. 她直到五点才会来见你。
2）现在进行时中动词加-ing的规则
一般情况
直接加-ing
carry--—rrying; meet—meeting; draw—drawing； see—seeing; say—saying;
以不发音的e结尾
去掉e，再加-ing
write—writing; ride—riding; use—using
以ie结尾
变ie为y，再加-ing
die—dying; tie—tying; lie—lying
以重读笔音节字母结尾
双写词末字母，
再加-ing
swim—swimming; put—putting;
begin—beginning; stop—stopping
12．I can spend 10 more minutes in bed then. 我还可以再睡10分钟。
more 被置于数字后面时，它的意思是“还、再、又”。“有同样用法的还有another。如果another被置于数字前面时，它也具有“还、再、又”的“思。但若another后面的数字为1时，往往不把“1”翻“出来。
如：Could you give us three more days？= Could you give us another three days?
我们的时间不够。你能再给我们三天时间吗？
Would you like to eat one more mango? = Would you like to eat another mango?
你想要再吃只芒果吗？
13．Today we are going to show you clothes from the 1970s to the 1990s.
今天我们将向你们展示20世纪70年代到20世纪90年代的服装。
the 1970s相当于the 70s of the 20th century，读作“the nineteen seventies”，意思是“20世纪70年代”。“常这一短语中的年份都是以0结尾的年份，如1860、2020等。短语中的the或s均不能省略。
如：He was born in the 1740s. 他出生在十八世纪四十年代。
This movie will tell us a story happened in the 1930s.
这部影片将告诉我们一个发生在二十世纪三十年代的故事。
14．Simon looked colourful. 西蒙看上去（穿得）很艳丽。
look的意思是“看上去”，“于系动词。系动词后面接形容词，不用副词, 而且无被动语态。类似的系动词还有：seem (似乎)、sound (听上去)、smell（闻起来）、taste（尝起来）、feel（感觉）等。
如：Your daughter looks very happy. 你女儿看上去很高兴。
The new song sounds really beautiful. 那首新歌听起来真的悦耳。
Her paintings didn’t seem very popular. 她的画似乎不是很受欢迎。
Did the old lady feel excited? 那位年长的女士感到兴奋吗？
How does the cake smell? Very delicious. 蛋糕闻上去如何？很美味。
I think the fish must taste good. 我想这鱼一定尝起来很好吃。
15．I wore a black skirt, long red boots and a red blouse.
我穿了条黑色的短裙，红色长靴和一件红色衬衣。
关于形容词的一般排列顺序如下：
“观点 --- 尺寸 --- 新旧 --- 形状 --- 颜色 --- 产地 --- 材料 --- 属性 + 名词”
“：some expensive small green Australian cotton toys 一些昂贵的澳大利亚小型绿色棉布玩具
There is a large old round wooden table in my home. 在我家有一张旧的大圆木桌。
They built a nice little Chinese restaurant 他们建造了一家美丽的中国小餐馆。
16．一般过去式
用一般过去时时，通常指动作何时发生，而不指动作持续多久。常与之连用的时间状语有yesterday, the day before yesterday, last week, three days ago，just now等。
A．表示过去发生的而现在已经结束的事件、动作或情况。
如：Sam phoned me a moment ago. 萨姆刚才打电话给我了。
Did you meet my mother this morning? 你今天早晨遇到我母亲了吗？
B．过去的习惯 表示过去的习惯性动作
如：My husband smoked forty cigarettes a day when he was young.
我丈夫年轻时一天抽40支烟。
How often did you go swimming in the university? 你在大学时多久去游泳一次？
C．表示刚刚发生过的事情，而不必说明时间。
如：We watched the fashion show in the park. 我们在公园里观看了时装秀。
Who forgot to close the door? 谁忘了关门了？
D．表示客气的询问 有时一般过去时并不表示过去的时间，它也可用来表示客气的询问（尤其是请别人帮助）。
如：Could you pass the cup to me? 你能把杯子递给我吗？
Would you come to my birthday party? 你要来参加我的生日聚会吗？
典 题 解 析
1．What will you do after you finish all of your math ________? I want to take some _________.
A. exercise, exercise B. exercise, exercises
C. exercises, exercise D. exercises, exercises
2．Could you tell me when she ________? I don’t know, but she will call me when she ________.
A. comes, comes B. will come, comes C. will come, will come D. comes, will come
3．Look! Why is this tie _________ expensive than that one?
A. much B. so C. so more D. much more
4．I don’t like this pair of hair clips. Could you show me __________ pair?
A. more B. another C. another one D. the other
5．Look at the stars in the sky! How ____________ they are!
A. bright stars B. brightly C. bright D. brightly stars
6．How do you like the ______________ sweater? I like it very much.
A. blue smart woolen American B. woolen American blue smart
C. smart blue American woolen D. smart American blue woolen
blue是“蓝色”，表示颜色；woolen是“羊毛的”，表示材料；American是“美国的”，表示示产地；smart是“时髦的”，表示说话人的观点。那么，根据形容词的一般排列顺序“观点 --- 尺寸 --- 新旧 --- 形状 --- 颜色 --- 产地 --- 材料 --- 属性”，“四个形容词的排列顺序为smart, blue, American, woolen, 故应选答案 C。 县官行令色国财
7．Mr. Road ________ our city in 1999. Could you tell me if he __________ our city next year?
A. visited, would visit B. visited, will visit C. visits, would visit D. visits, will visit
8．The baby ___________ ill. It should ____________ after well.
A. is looked, be looked B. is looked, look C. looks, be looked D. looks, look
9．The new gloves _________ well. All of them _____________ out this afternoon.
A. sold, sold B. sold, were sold
C. were sold, sold D. were sold, were sold
sell well的意思是“卖得好、销路好”，没有被动语态；sell out的意思是“卖光”，有被动语态。故应选答案B。
10．The poor man was made _____________ in the park last night.
A. to sleep B. sleep C. sleeping D. slept
综 合 练 习（A）
IV. 单项选择（15%）
( ) 1. One sock is on the bed. Where’s ________________?
A. others B. the other one C. another D. the others
( ) 2. ______________ she is dancing!
A. What beautiful B. How beautiful C. What beautifully D. How beautifully
( ) 3. This room is ________________.
A. Jack and Simon’s B. Jack’s and Simon’s
C. Jack’s and Simon D. Jack and Simon
( ) 4. Mother has made a big cake _____________ her children.
A. to B. for C. of D. on
( ) 5. The manager looks _____________ today.
A. nicely B. friendly C. politely D. kindly
( ) 6. Where can I find a ____________________ box?
A. cheap plastic big B. plastic big cheap
C. cheap big plastic D. big plastic cheap
( ) 7. Many roses ____________ on this farm and they ___________ very well there.
A. grow, are grown B. are grown, grow C. grow, grow D.are grown,are grown
( ) 8. Do you think it is _____________ hotter today?
A. very B. little C. too D. much
( ). 9. What is the hat made of ?
A. Last year. B. In my hometown. C. Wool. D. Woolen
( )10. There’s a discount _____________ these shoes.
A. in B. on C. for D. of
( )11. You were seen ____________ into that restaurant last night.
A. to run B. run C. running D. ran
( )12. It’s strange. Why ________ the monkey __________ its head all the time?
A. does, shake B. did, shake C. is, shaking D. will, shake
( )13. My cousin, Amy, __________ goes to the cinema. She has been to the cinema only two or three times since she went to school.
A. often B. never C. seldom D. usually
( )14. My bike is broken today. Could you __________ yours to me?
A. lend B. borrow C. to lend D. to borrow
( )15. ____________ did the teacher give the students a talk? Once a week.
A. How long B. How many C. How D. How often
V. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (5%)
1．Millie gave an ___________ (interest) talk on “The Life of a _________ (train)”.
2．I don’t think the film is good. I __________ (like) it.
3．Suzhou is one of the most beautiful ____________ (city) in China.
4．Daniel is the ___________ (good) student in our class.
VI. 用所给动词的适当形式填空 （5%）
1．I don’t have much time __________ (discuss) it with you.
2．Will the boy play computer games after he ____________ (finish) his work?
3．She likes fish, but she doesn’t like ______________ (eat) meat.
4．--- When ___________ these letters ___________ (send)?
--- You’d better ___________ (ask) Ms. Liu for her decision.
VII. 根据上下文意思，正确翻译括号内所给的中文 (10%)
We _________ (度过) a day in the country and picked a lot of flowers. Our car was _________ (满的) of flowers inside! On the way home we had to stop at ___________ (交通) lights, and there my wife saw the ____________ (书架). It stood outside a furniture shop. “Buy it,” she said at once. “We’ll __________ (搬) it home on the roof-rack. I’ve __________ (总是) wanted one like that.” What could I do? Ten ___________ (分钟) later I was twenty dollars __________ (更穷), and it was __________ (绑) on to the roof-rack. It was tall and __________ (窄的), quite heavy too.
VIII. 完成下列句子 (15%)
1． 举行一场篮球比赛是很令人兴奋的。
______________________________________________________________________________
2．那些德国人再也不去那儿买书了。
______________________________________________________________________________
3．在十六世纪四十年代，谁是英国的国王？
______________________________________________________________________________
4．如果你想要保持健康，你就必须有健康的饮食。
______________________________________________________________________________
5．请等着轮到你给这件外套付款。
______________________________________________________________________________
IX. 完型填空 (10%)
The earth is our home. We must take care of it. That is to say we must keep the land, air and ___1___ clean.
But man has begun to pollute（污染）the earth ___2___ he first made a fire, washed his clothes in the river and threw dirty things ___3____. Many years ago, pollution was not so serious because there were not ___4___ many people. There was enough clean air, land and water. When the land or the river was dirty in one place, man ___5___ another place, But now man is slowly polluting the whole world and there is ___6___ enough clean air, nor clean land, nor clean water. More people, more ___7___.
When is this all to ___8___? Is it possible to get rid of (消除) pollution? We are glad to say that people have come to know the ___9___ of pollution and ___10___ them are working hard to protect (保护) our earth.
( ) 1. A. river B. sea C. lake D. water
( ) 2. A. before B. while C. since D. when
( ) 3. A. on the ground B. into the air C. into space D. near the buildings
( ) 4. A. such B. so C. too D. as
( ) 5. A. lived B. flew to C. left to D. moved to
( ) 6. A. no B. neither C. either D. not any
( ) 7. A. luck B. clean places C. pollution D. dirty cities
( ) 8. A. end B. start C. over D. develop
( ) 9. A. dangerous B. importance C. danger D. use
( )10. A. much of B. a lot C. the large number of D. a large number of
X. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
A rich young man spent all his money buying food and wine and going out with girls. Because he spent all his money, he had to become a beggar. He even had to sell all his nice clothes. The only clothes he had left were torn and dirty.
He walked up and down the street begging for good and money. He also often stood outside the doors of rich people’s houses. He hoped that the rich people that he knew would see who he was. Then they would be kind enough to give him some money. But when the rich people did see him, they turned their head away from him. They did not want to know him.
One day he walked past the house of a rich girl that he had spent a lot of time with when
he was rich. Then he heard the girl’s voice as she sang a song.
She sang, “Because of you, I have lost my beauty…”
“Because of you,” he cried, “I have neither tea nor bread.”
( ) 1.The man spent all his money because ______________________________.
A. someone would give him more money
B. he wanted to have a good time, and didn’t need to work
C. he was a kind man and he always gave his money to the poor people
D. his business was very bad and he got no money from it.
( ) 2. When he had no money, he had to ______________________.
A. work in a factory B. go to his good friend’s home for help
C. beg along the street D. wait to die
( ) 3. He often went to the houses of rich people that he had know because _______.
A. they always gave him something to eat
B. it made him think of his life when he was rich
C. he thought his old friends would help him
D. he had no way to go
( ) 4. “Because of you, I have neither tea nor bread.” He means ________________.
A. Because the girl stole all his money, he had no money to buy anything to eat or drink.
B. Because the girl had all the tea and bread, he couldn’t buy any of them.
C. The girl didn’t like tea or bread, so he didn’t want any tea or bread, either.
D. She was one of the girls who spent much of his money and made him poor.
( ) 5. From the passage, the meaning of “torn” is __________________.
A. 旧的 B. 撕破的 C. 最喜欢的 D. 合身的
(B)
A famous doctor once attended (护理) a little boy who was dangerously ill. Thanks to his skill and care, his young patient (病人) got well soon, and was able to get up and run around. The child’s mother was very grateful, and she called on the doctor to thank him for what he had done for her son.
“Doctor” she said, “you have saved my little boy’s life. I do not know how to thank you enough. I feel that money alone cannot repay you, but I have made this little purse (钱包) with my own hands as a present. I hope you will like it.”
The doctor stood up and said coldly. “Madam, little presents like that are nice between friends, but a doctor needs paying for his attention.”
The lady was too surprised and hurt to answer for a moment. Then she said quickly, “ Perhaps you will tell me what your fee (酬金) is, doctor?”
“Fifty pounds,” he answered.
The lady opened the little purse that she has made and took out fifty-pound bank notes. She gave one of them to the doctor, and put the other three back into the purse. She put the purse into her handbag. After saying good-bye to the doctor, she went out of the room.
( ) 6．From the story, we know the mother ________________________________.
A. bought a little purse from a shop
B. got a purse from her friend
C. made a purse by hand
D. asked someone to make a purse
( ) 7．The doctor ___________________________.
A. wasn’t good at his job
B. was very glad to see the child’s mother
C. was a warm-hearted person
D. got a fifty-pound bank note from the child’s mother
( ) 8．The doctor didn’t accept (接受) the little purse because _____________________.
A. he was a very good doctor and he thought it was his duty to save the child’s life
B. he thought it was too cheap for a famous doctor like him to accept
C. he didn’t like the purse which was made by the child’s mother
D. he thought only good friends could accept it
( ) 9．From the story above, we can guess the meaning of “call on” is ________________.
A. go to visit B. give…a ring C. invite (邀请) D. shout to
( ) 10．Which one is NOT true according to the story?
A. The little boy was terribly ill at first.
B. The doctor’s skill was very good.
C. The child’s mother wanted to give the doctor 150 pounds at first.
D. What the doctor said made the mother feel really bad.
XI. 书面表达：(15’)
假设今天早晨妈妈不在家，你不得不自己照顾自己。请根据以下要求写一篇小作文。
要求：1. 完整表达内容，但不得逐字翻译。 2. 字数不少于60个。
内容：1. 起床后，洗脸刷牙。
2．吃早饭时，找不到面包，不在冰箱里也不在桌上。最后只喝了点牛奶。
3．然后，洗衣服，却忘了洗袜子。
4．打扫房间时，打破了一只玻璃杯，你很恼火。
5．快中午时肚子饿了。这半天，你觉得很累，还是妈妈在家好。
综 合 练 习（B）
听 力 部 分
I．听下面5个句子。根据你所听到的内容选择恰当的答语。每个句子读两遍。(5%)
( ) 1. A. It’s a secret. B. She is twenty-four.
C. I am not very old, I think. D. I have no idea.
( ) 2. A. Hold on, please. B. Sorry, it’s a wrong number.
C. Yes, I can. D. Certainly, here you are.
( ) 3. A. One year ago. B. For nearly 2 years.
C. I was in Sydney in 2003. D. It will take you 15 hours.
( ) 4. A. Coke. B. Peas. C. Oranges D. Bread.
( ) 5. A. Very good. B. Quite well. C. By bike. D. An office worker.
II. 听下面5段对话。每段对话后有一个小题。请根据所听对话内容和问题选择正确答案。每段对话读两遍。（5%）
( ) 1. A. Near the post office. B. Near the road
C. Near the bus stop. D. You can’t find it.
( ) 2. A. It’s rainy. B. It’s foggy. C. It’s sunny. D. It’s snowy.
( ) 3. A. Betty. B. Tim. C. Mrs. Read. D. Mr. Read.
( ) 4. A. Because it was the woman’s birthday.
B. Because he wanted to stay at home.
C. Because the woman didn’t want him to come.
D. Because he didn’t know about that.
( ) 5. A. Who bought me the cheese. B. Who moved my cheese.
C. Who made my cheese D. Who ate my cheese.
笔 试 部 分
III．单项选择 （15%）
( )1. I’m looking ______ a birthday gift _______ my brother.
A. for, for B. at, to C. after, to D. for, to
( )2. He doesn’t have money ________ the computer.
A. buying B. for buy C. to buy D. on
( )3. “I love the new cards better.” Means “______________.”
A. I like the new cards. B. My favourite is the new cards.
C. I prefer the new cards. D. I like the new cards most.
( )4. Kitty doesn’t want to take the same things _______ Amy did.
A. as B. like C. however D. before
( )5. I think the shop needs ________ more food.
A. some B. any C. not any D. not
( )6. Amy is talking with her penfriend _____ the phone.
A. in B. on C. over D. Both B and C
( )7. Which of the following is not a kind of stationary?
A. notebooks B. bank cards C. writing paper D. rubbers
( )8. I really need _________________ my homework.
A. some helps to B. any help with C. some help with D. any help to
( )9. It’s noisy now. We can’t hear __________________.
A. your well B. her well C. her clear D. his well
( )10. There is a boy waiting for me __________ the game.
A. finish B. finishes C. to finish D. finishing
( )11. I’m very hungry, but I __________ bread. So I want to buy _________.
A. have some, some B. have no, some C. don’t have any, one D. have any, some
( )12. The fancy dress ________ her new boots very ________.
A. match, much B. is match, well C. matches, well D. matches, much
( )13. I think the hair clip is pretty. Please _____________.
A. try it on B. try on it C. try them on D. try on them
( )14. The poor woman is calling 110 ______ help.
A. to B. for C. in D. by
( )15. --- ________ do you want? --- I want a size 30.
A. What B. How big C. How size D. What size
IV．动词填空 （10%）
1．He never ________(watch) TV in the evening.
2．There ________(be) lots of milk in the kitchen. But _________ (not put) the milk in the fridge.
3．Look! The old women __________(practise) Tai Chi in front of the house.
4．--- What _____ their father often _______(do) on Sunday afternoon?
--- He _______( read) newspapers. But he ________(clean) his car now.
5．The park is a good place ___________(fly) kites.
6．She likes ________(buy) some snacks before _________(see) a film.
V．完成句子 (20%)
1.在超市里妈妈需要他提着所有的食物。
Mother ________ _______ to ________ all the food in the __________.
2.我相信这个随身听可以打折。
I am _______ there ________ a _________ ________ the Walkman.
3.这双足球鞋多少钱？
How ________ _______ this pair of football _________ _________?
4.她宁愿买一双便宜些的。
She ________ ________ ________ a __________ pair.
5．隔壁还有三家体育用品商店。
There are ______ three ________ ________ ________ door.
VI．句型转换 (5%)
1．The lady over there is asking for help. (改成一般疑问句)
____________________________________________________________
2．There is a clothes shop near our school. (根据划线部分提问)
____________________________________________________________
3. They are playing basketball in the playground. (根据划线部分提问)
____________________________________________________________
4. He often spends 10 yuan on his lunch every day. (根据划线部分提问)
____________________________________________________________
5. Sandy usually runs for half an hour at school. (用now改写)
____________________________________________________________
VII．句子改错 (10%)
1. Mr. Wu asked Simon and I to help him. ___________________
2. Are there two shoe shops on the top floors? ___________________
3. She must pay $40 to the fancy handbag. ___________________
4. There always are lots of people in the shopping mall. ___________________
5. Where is Amy writes to her friends now? ___________________
6. Tom likes play tennis after school. ___________________
7. Would you like reading today’s newspaper? ___________________
8. Tony with his sister go to the park every Sunday. ___________________
9. The boy often doesn’t his homework. ___________________
10.He often visits the old museum last year. ___________________
VIII．完形填空 (10%)
Mrs. Smith’s old _1 lived with her and her husband. Every morning he went for a walk in the park and came home 2 noon for his 3_ .
But one morning a police car stopped 4 Mrs. Smith’s house at twelve o’clock, and two __5 helped the old man to get out. One of them said to Mrs. Smith, “The poor old gentleman lost his way in the park and telephoned to us 6 help, so we sent a car to 7 him home.” Mrs. Smith was very 8 , but she thanked them and they left.
“But, Grandpa,” she then said, “you have been to that park almost every day 9 twenty years. How did you lose your way there?”
The old man smiled, closed one eye and said, “I didn’t lose my way. In fact, I got tired and I didn’t want to go home 10 foot.
( )1. A. father B. uncle C. grandfather D. grandmother
( )2. A. in B. on C. at D. to
( )3. A. lunch B. supper C. breakfast D. water
( )4. A. in B. inside C. outside D. on
( )5. A. polices B. policemans C. policemen D. policemens
( )6. A. to B. for C. in D. with
( )7. A. bringing B. sending C. taking D. bring
( )8. A. free B. healthy C. fancy D. surprised
( )9. A. in B. at C. for D. on
( )10. A. by B. on C. with D. for
IX．阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Sociologists(社会学家), working in western countries, have found that a large number of women wished they had been born men. The number is said to be as high as 60% in Germany.
“Women often wish they had the same chances as men have, and think it is still men’s world,” said Dr James Helen, one of the sociologists who did the study.
Many men say that they have more duties than women. A man has to make money to support(养活) his family and to make the important decision(决定), so it is right for men to be paid more. Some are even against their wives working at all. When wives go out to work, they say, the home and children can not be taken good care of. If women take full—time jobs, they won’t be able to do what they are best at doing: making a nice home and bringing up the children.
Some women disagree. They say they want to get out of their homes and to have freedom to choose between work and home life. Women have the right of equal pay and equal chances (平等机会) .
Anne Harper has a very good job. She also believes in “Women’s Liberation.”（解放） “I don’t
wish I were a man,” she say, “and I don’t think many women do. But I do wish people would stop treating us like second-class people(二等公民). At work, for example, we usually do the work that men do but get paid less. There are still a lot of jobs only to men usually they are the best ones. If you are a man, you have a much better chance of living a wonderful life. How many women scientists are there……or engineers.?”
（ ）1. Many men think .
A. women can’t do what men can
B. men have to work much harder than women
C. men can make money more easily than women
D. women’s duty is mainly to do housework at home
（ ）2. Some women have different ideas. They say that .
A. women need chances to go out of the home more often
B. women want more freedom in deciding the kind of life they want
C. if women are given equal pay, they can do everything instead of men
D. women are no longer interested in taking care of their homes
（ ）3. Anne Harper didn’t wish to be a man .
A. because she believed in “Women’s Liberation”
B. but she wished to get the same job as men
C. because she had got a good job
D. but she wished to be treated the same as a man
（ ）4. Anne Harper thought that women should .
A. live a better life than men B. be really liberated
C. be given better jobs than men D. live a more wonderful life than men
（ ）5. Which of the following is not true according to the passage?
A. There are more men scientists, engineers than women ones
B. Women are second—class people, so they shouldn’t live a better life
C. Women do the same jobs as men, but get paid less than men
D. There are some best jobs that women have few chances to take
(B)
When all the housewives went to the new supermarket, they had one great hope in mind: to be the lucky customer who did not have to pay for her shopping, for this was what the notice just inside the entrance promised . It said, “Remember, once a week, one of our customers gets free goods. This may be YOUR lucky day!”
For several weeks Mrs. Read hoped to become a lucky customer, like many of her friends did, and she never gave up hope. Her dear husband tried to advise her not to do so, but he failed. She always dreamed of the day when the manager of the supermarket would come up to her and say, “Madam, this is your lucky day. Everything in your basket is free.”
One Friday morning, after she had finished her shopping and had taken it to her car, she found that she had forgotten to buy some tea. She dashed (猛冲) back to the supermarket, got the tea, and went towards the cashdesk (付款处). As she did so, she saw the manager of the supermarket come up to her. “Madam,” he said and held out his hand, “I want to congratulate you! You are the lucky customer and everything you have in your basket is free!”
6. The housewives learned about the offer (提供的物品 )of free goods _______________.
A. on the television B. from one of their best friends
C. over the radio D. at the supermarket
7. The supermarket offers free goods to a lucky customer _______________.
A. once every seventh day B. on some lucky day
C. once a month D. every afternoon
8. Mrs Read’s husband had tried _________________.
A. to get some tea for his dear wife B. to stop his wife from buying more things
C. to help his wife get a chance (机会)to have free goods
D. to congratulate his wife on her great luck
9. The manager walked towards the lady after she got some tea because he _____________.
A. found that the customer had forgotten to take the tea
B. wanted to help her carry her heavy basket
C. wanted to shake hands (握手) with her to express (表达) his congratulations
D. hoped to say goodbye to his customer
10. Which is the best topic of this passage?
A. Free Goods B. A Good Supermarket C. A “Lucky” Housewife D. A Dream
7B Unit 1---2
重 点 词 组
would like to do 想要做某事 live next to a restaurant 住在餐馆的隔壁
the capital of France 法国的首都 my favourite place 我最喜欢的地方
a wooden house 一座木房子 over a river 河上面
my own bedroom 我自己的卧室 it rains a lot 经常下雨
make dinner 做饭 in the center of 在……的中心
share … with … 和某人分享某物 a dining room 餐厅
a sitting room 客厅 arrive in / at 到达
can’t wait to do 迫不及待做某事 where else … 其他什么地方
get eighty-one points 得81分 be different from 和……不同
on the ground floor 在底楼 at the same time 同时
speak to 交谈 I’m afraid … 恐怕
take a message 捎口信 call sb back 回电话给某人
order a pizza 叫一份匹萨 a football pitch 足球场
a swimming pool 游泳池 have a shower / bath 洗淋浴或洗澡
at least 至少 two floors above / below …上面或下面两层
by underground 乘地铁 on my bicycle 骑我的自行车
air pollution 空气污染 in other areas of Beijing 在北京其他地区
go walking 去散步 such a tall building 如此一幢高楼
be close to 离得近 don’t have to go far 不必走太远
want help with … 在某方面需要帮助 all your souvenirs 你所有的纪念品
shopping malls 大卖场 any food you like 任何你喜欢的食物
Western restaurants 西餐馆 local theatre 当地的剧院
sing Beijing opera 唱京剧 make the air dirty 使得空气变脏
speak Putonghua 讲普通话 thirty of each 每样三十个
four big cartons of milk 四大盒牛奶 three kilos of each 每样三公斤
exchange students 交换生 have a really good time 玩得的确开心
talk to … in English 用英语交谈 grow vegetables 种蔬菜
works of art 艺术品 Chinese paintings 中国画
at the youth center 在青年中心 ride bicycles 骑自行车
show you around my home town 带你参观我的家乡
enjoy a full day there 在那儿愉快地过了一整天
the best game in the world 世界上最好的运动
climb a ladder to get into my house 爬梯子进入我家
the best place to grow flowers 种花最好的地方
come first in the English exam 英语考试第一名
take them to the sports center 带他们去体育中心
tell somebody about something 告诉某人关于某事
send an e-mail to somebody 发电子邮件给某人
语 法 精 讲
1. 方位介词（Prepositions of place）
1) 常用的方位介词（词组）
成反义词：above---below, over---under, inside---outside, in front of---behind
有关联的：above---over---on, below---under, beside---next to, at---in,
between---among
其他：opposite
2) 使用时的注意点
A. 方位介词在句子中的位置
The book is under the desk. （be动词的后面）
He is standing between the two trees.（实义动词的后面）
Do you know the man in front of the classroom?（放在名词后面修饰它）
He lives in an old house in the center of the city.（作为整句话的状语）
B. above和below，over和under
这两组反义词的前者都表示“在上方”，后者都表示“在下方”。
There are some bridges over the river. What’s under the bed? An old shoe.
The shelf is above the top bunk bed. She lives two floors below Linda.
C. above, over和on
这三个词都表示“在上面”，on是指和物体有接触，over是指在正上方，没有接触面，above也是没有接触面，正上方或斜上方，但现在可代替over，如：
The wooden house is over / above the river. The bag is on the table.
There is a plane flying above our heads.
D. at和in
这两个词常用在arrive后面，at后加小地点，in后加大地点，如：
He arrived at the airport at 4 p.m. We will arrive in Beijing tomorrow morning.
E. between和among
between是指在两者之间，常用词组between…and…，而among是在三者或三者以上之间，如：
I sit between Lily and Lucy.
Mr. Li likes staying among his students.（注：英语中的复数名词，没有特别指出是两个，都默认为三者或三者以上）
F. opposite：在对面 如：Our school is opposite a park..
2. 基数词（Cardinal numbers）
表示数目的数词是基数词。
1) 基数词的构成
A. 两位数：十位数与个位数之间加连字符。如：23 twenty-three
B. 三位数：百位数与最后两位数加and（美语省略and）。
如：201 two hundred and one 642 six hundred and forty-two
C. 四位数：thousand之后加逗号，后面依照以上原则。
如：1,351 one thousand, three hundred and fifty-one
D. 表示万以上的数目，将数字由右向左每三位加一个逗号，使一个数字分成几个小节，称为thousand节，million节等，然后按节处理，如：
68,343 sixty-eight thousand, three hundred and forty-three
13, 526, 300 thirteen million, five hundred twenty-six thousand, three hundred
▲英语中没有直接的单词来表示“万”和“亿”，如：
一万 10,000 ten thousand 两万 20,000 twenty thousand
十万 100,000 one hundred thousand 三十万 300,000 three hundred thousand
一千万 10,000,000 ten million 两千万 20,000,000 twenty million
一亿 100,000,000 one hundred million
▲表示十亿，美国用one billion，英国用one thousand million
2)基数词的运用
A. 表示确切数目时，hundred，thousand和million只能用单数，不能变复数；但表示不确定的数目时，要用复数形式。如：
five hundred 五百 three thousand 三千 hundreds of 成百上千的 thousands of 成千上万的 millions of 数百万的
B. 表示时间：7:30 seven thirty
C. 表示年代：in the 1980s（读作nineteen eighties）在二十世纪八十年代
2005（读作two thousand and five）
D. 表示不确定的年龄：in his twenties 在他二十几岁时
3. 序数词（Ordinal numbers）
表示人或物的顺序的数词是序数词。
1) 序数词的构成
一二三，特殊记， （first，second，third）
加th从四起； (从四开始所有的序数词都是以th结尾的。)
八少t，九少e； (eight去t加th变成eighth，nine去e加上th变成 ninth)
逢五与十二，f替ve ； (five，twelve中ve变为f再加th，就成为fifth，twelfth)
二十到九十，y变ie； （20~90等十位整数的基数词都是以y结尾的，
变成序数词时要变y为ie,再加th。例如：twentieth，thirtieth等。）
若是几十几，前基后序要牢记。（这些词的序数词写法是：十位数保持基数词不变，个位数改成序数词，如：twenty-first, ninety-fifth.）
▲百位数的序数词：百位数用基数词＋后面十位数或个位数的序数词，如：
第二百二十 two hundred and twentieth 第二百零三 two hundred and third
▲序数词的缩写形式由阿拉伯数字加序数词的最后两个字母构成，如：
two hundred and twentieth --- 220th two hundred and third --- 203rd
▲第九 ninth 十九 nineteen 第十九 nineteenth
九十 ninety 第九十 ninetieth
第四 fourth 十四 fourteen 第十四 fourteenth
四十 forty 第四十 fortieth
2）序数词的用法
A. 表示日期，如：March 18th, 1978 或 18th March, 1978
B. 表示编号或顺序，如：the sixth lesson = Lesson Six
C. 前面一般加定冠词the，如：He is the first student to get to the school every day.
▲ 如果序数词前面有形容词性物主代词，可以不加the，如：
It was his fifth bowl of rice for lunch.
D. 有时还可以作副词用，如：I finished the homework first in my class today.
4. No和None的用法
1) no
A. no表示“没有”，作为形容词时后面接名词（可数和不可数），相当于not … any 或
not … a,
如：I have no brothers. = I do not have any brothers.
There is no student in the classroom. = There is not a student in the classroom.
I drank no water this morning. = I did not drink any water this morning.
B. 还可以用来回答一般疑问句，如：
Did you have lunch? No, I didn’t.
2) none
表示“没有人”或“没有东西”，后面不能接名词，可以作为可数或不可数。如：
---How many chips are there in the packet? ---There are none.
---how much orange juice do you have? ---We have none.
5. 定冠词The
1) 指上文所提到过的人或物， 如：I have a cat. The cat is white.
2) 指世界上独一无二的事物， 如：the capital of China, the sun
3) 用于序数词，方位名词和最高级的前面， 如：the second, in the north, the best game
4) 用于乐器前面， 如：play the piano
5) 用于一些形容词的前面，表示一类人， 如：the old 老人，the rich 富人
6. There is a swimming pool which is 50 metres long. 有一个50米长的游泳池。
这里which is 50 metres long 是修饰前面的a swimming pool，在英语中不能像中文一样把句子放在名词前面作为修饰语，所以放在该名词的后面，which是关系词，在以后的学习中会详细表述。再来一个例句：
I have a friend who can play tennis. 我有一个会打网球的朋友。
7. want help with our homework. 在作业方面需要帮助
在这里help是不可数名词，所以用want (some) help表示“需要一些帮助”，动词help用词组help … with …，意思是“在某方面帮助某人”，因此名词词组也用with，want (some) help with。
8. You can shop until ten. 你可以一直购物到十点。
until意思“直到”，前面的动作一直做到until后面的时间，还有一种用法，
not … until的含义是“不做某事直到“，即意为”直到… 才…“。如：
He didn’t go to bed until 11 o’clock last night. 昨晚他直到11点才上床睡觉。
We won’t leave here until we are told to. 我们直到被告知（离开）才会离开这儿。
9. Why don’t you visit our local theatre with us?
为何不和我们一起参观当地的剧院呢？
Why don’t you do something? = Why not do something? 表示提出建议，其他句型还有：
What / How about something / doing something?
如：How about drinking milk? 喝牛奶如何？
Let’s do …. 如：Let’s learn something interesting. 让我们学点有趣的东西吧。
Shall we do …? 如：Shall we do some shopping this weekend? 这个周末我们去购物吗？
We’d better do … 如：We’d better tell him the truth. 我们最好告诉他真相。
10. The party was really great, wasn’t it? 这个聚会真的很棒，不是吗？
这是反意疑问句。该句型有三个原则：前后人称一致，前后动词一致，前面肯定后面否定。人称一致是指后面用的人称代词要和前面的主语一致，it替代的是the party；代词一致是指前后用同一种代词并且时态一致。如：
He can play football, can’t he? She went to Shanghai last week, didn’t she?
There wasn’t a meeting yesterday, was there?
典 例 解 析
1. Every spring, people plant __________ trees to make our city more beautiful.
A. five thousands of B. five thousands C. thousand of D. thousands of
2. ________ student comes from France.
A. Twenty-three B. The twenty-three C. The twenty-third D. Twenty-third
3. The teacher is giving us a talk ___________ the classroom.
A. in front of B. in the front of C. under D. between
4. I think Kunming is a good place _______ either in summer or in winter.
A. going B. to go C. goes D. go
5. What ________ do you want to buy?
A. other B. else C. else things D. others
6. It ________ me five minutes to walk to school.
A. spends B. costs C. takes D. has
7. Wilson lives on the tenth floor and Elsa lives on the sixth floor. So Wilson lives 4 floors _______ Elsa and Elsa lives 4 floors _______ Wilson.
A. below / above B. above / below C. on / under D. under / on
8. Our school playground is about _______________.
A. 400 metre long B. 400 metres long C. 400-metres-long D. 400-metre-long
综 合 练 习 (A)
III. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1. There are _____________ things to do in Sunshine Town.
A. lots B. lot of C. many D. much
( ) 2. We want to _____________ you __________ life in our city.
A. say/about B. talk/of C. speak/of D. tell/about
( ) 3. How do you go to school every day? _____________.
A. By a bike B. By a bicycle C. On my bicycle D. In my bike
( ) 4. I live in a house __________ a bus stop.
A. near to B. next C. close to D. is close
( ) 5. Do you want me to help you ___________ your English?
A. of B. to C. with D. to learning
( ) 6. What _________ you ____________ last night in the bushes? I heard nothing.
A. are / hearing B. will / hear C. did / hear D. did / heard
( ) 7. Look! A dog ____________ in the middle of the road. Please try to move it away.
A. lieing B. is lieing C. lying D. is lying
( ) 8. Don’t make any noise. Peter is sleeping in his __________.
A. bunk bed B. bunk beds C. bunk D. beds
( ) 9. Did you ________ a taxi to the park yesterday?
A. order B. buy C. mend D. sell
( ) 10. My brother enjoys _______ and he often goes to __________.
A. to play football, a shopping mall B. playing football, restaurants
C. to play football, a playground D. playing football, a sports center
( ) 11. _______ do these apples cost?
A. How B. How many C. How much D. What
( ) 12. There is ______ any milk left in the fridge.
A. no B. not C. none D. some
( ) 13. Simon is going to show you ______ his new school later.
A. in B. at C. visit D. around
( ) 14. It ________ Mr. Yang half an hour to get here yesterday.
A. take B. took C. spends D. costs
( ) 15. Who _______ are you going to meet tomorrow?
A. other B. else C. others D. else people
IV. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (10%)
1. He lives in a __________ house. The house is made of large __________.(wood)
2. My mother always makes ______ in the kitchen. We have supper in the _______ room. (dinner)
3. Our neighbors are all very _________. We often make ________ with each other. (friend)
4. They ______(hold) a party for the American students last Sunday. It _____(be) very interesting.
5. My parents usually go _________(walk) after supper along the river bank.
6. Why _________(not go) to the zoo instead？
V. 句型转换 (5%)
1. We need four cartons of milk.(根据划线部分提问)
______________________________________________________________________________
2. I had three loaves of bread for breakfast. (根据划线部分提问)
______________________________________________________________________________
3. My uncle bought a tin of Coke for me in the shop nearby. (根据划线部分提问)
______________________________________________________________________________
4. It takes 40 minutes to walk to the supermarket. (根据划线部分提问)
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Neil lives with his parents in a flat in the center of a city. (根据划线部分提问)
______________________________________________________________________________
VI. 完成句子 (15%)
1. 瓶子里有多少橘汁？一点也没有。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 妈妈正在厨房中做饭。我能捎个口信吗？
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 底楼有一个游泳池。你想去那儿吗？
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 我将带你去参观我的家乡。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 我恐怕不能帮你。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完型填空 (10%)
All big cities are quite similar. Living in a modern Asian city is not different __①__ living in an American city. But the same cannot be said about ___②___ on farms.
In many parts of __③__ , farmers and their families live in villages or towns. In the USA, each farm family live on __④___ own fields, and often they live far away from each other. __⑤__traveling from a village to the fields every morning, American farmers stay on their land __⑥__. They travel to the nearest town on Saturdays for __⑦__.
Of course life __⑧__ changing for everyone, including(包括) farmers. Today they have cars, good roads, radios and television sets. __⑨__ of course there are modern machines for farming. __⑩__ have changed farm life.
( ) 1. A. from B. as C. with D. for
( ) 2. A. lived B. live C. living D. lives
( ) 3. A. the country B. the world C. the city D. the mountain
( ) 4. A. one’s B. its C. it’s D. his
( ) 5. A. Instead of B. Instead C. Not to D. For
( ) 6. A. for a moment B. for weekdays C. several times D. for a visit
( ) 7. A. swimming B. fishing C. shopping D. beginning
( ) 8. A. keeps B. stops C. start D. beginning
( ) 9. A. Or B. But C. So D. And
( )10. A. Much of it B. Some of these C. All of these D. Many of these
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Many people have dogs or cats as pets. Mr. Jenkins wanted a different kind of pet, so he bought a lion!
The first night, Mr. Jenkins put the lion in a bedroom and locked the door. The next morning he went to look at his new pet. The lion had broken the bed, eaten a blanket, torn the rug, and chewed a chair.
Mr. Jenkins sold the lion and bought a puppy. He said, “A puppy is a better pet to have in a house. Lions belong in zoos.”
( )1. Which of the following is Mr. Jenkins’ new pet?
A. a cat B. a dog C. a lion D. a pig
( )2. Mr. Jenkins put his pet in a _________.
A. kitchen B. cage C. garage D. bedroom
( )3. Mr. Jenkins kept his pet ___________.
A. for a short time B. for many years
C. in his car D. to scare people
( )4. The story says that the pet __________.
A. ate the bed B. tore the rug C. hid a table D. bit Mr. Jenkins
( )5. The best title is ______________.
A. A Puppy That Chased a Lion B. Lions Are Not Good Pets
C. Building a New House D. A Lion Runs Away
(B)
Mrs Smith often felt lonely when her husband went to work. The room was small and it took her only half an hour to tidy（整理） it. She couldn't get up early in the morning, so Mr Smith had to prepare （准备）breakfast himself. She usually had some bread and milk for lunch and cooked supper for herself and her husband. They had no television. They always went to bed at nine.
It was a winter morning. The sun was shining and it was warmer outside. Mrs Smith sat on the steps(台阶) of a shop, looking at the busy traffic（交通）. At that moment a man with a map in his hand was coming to her.
"Excuse me, madam, " said the man. "Could you tell me how to get to the nearest hospital, please?"
Mrs Smith didn't answer until she looked at him up and down. "He seems（好象） to be a farmer," she said to herself. "Let me make fun of him."
Then she said, "Lie down in the middle of the street and you'll soon be sent to a hospital."
"Please show me how to do that, then," said the man.
She has to tell him the way and then she said, "I think you've been in the city for the first time. It's much more beautiful than the fields, isn't it?"
"Yes, madam," said the farmer with a smile. "But I think it was built on the fields!"
( ) 6. Mrs. Smith couldn't get up early in the morning, so her husband ______.
A felt lonely B. cleaned the room
C. had to prepare breakfast himself D. would do shopping in the morning
( ) 7. The Smiths always went to bed at nine because they ______.
A. had no television B. went to work every morning
C. were very tired in the daytime D. had to prepare lunch for themselves
( ) 8. The man with a map in his hand wanted to go to ________.
A. a city B. a shop C. a hospital D. a room
( ) 9. Mrs. Smith thought the man _______, so she was going to make fun of him.
A. was a farmer B. was a traveller
C. would ask her the way D. came from a city
( )10. Which of the following is true according (根据) to the story ?
A. The farmer felt very disappointed
B. The farmer cleverly answered the woman.
C. Mrs. Smith got the farmer into trouble.
D. The farmer didn't know how to answer the woman.
IX. 书面表达 （15%）
假定你 ( Li Lei) 在去年夏令营认识的一个朋友 Jim 从英国给你寄来一件礼物——一件红色的衬衫， 并附有一封信。 在信中他向你问好，并想知道近来你在忙些什么。请你给他写一封回信（100 词左右）。 回信要包括以下内容：
1． 向Jim问好并向他表示感谢；
2． 礼物是你最喜欢的颜色，尺寸很合适，你非常喜欢
3． 告诉Jim你近来很好，上周刚过完生日，生日聚会很热闹。询问Jim的近况，并表示希望他能来中国。
注意：信中不得使用真实的人名和地名
综 合 练 习 (B)
III. 单项选择 (15%)
（ ）1. Please _________ the book there tomorrow.
A. bring B. take C. carry D. walk
（ ）2. It ___________ you two hours to fly to Shanghai tomorrow.
A. will take B. took C. takes D. take]
（ ）3. He is _________ seven years old. He is not old enough to go to school.
A. least than B. less than C. at less D. at least
（ ）4. What about _______________ tomorrow?
A. go fish B. go fishing C. going fish D. going fishing
（ ）5. Millie is a young girl ____________ short hair and big eyes.
A. of B. have C. has D. with
（ ）6. There is a big park _______________ of our classroom. We always have fun there.
A. at the front of B. in the front of C. at the back of D. in front of
（ ）7. All of your friends have come here. _____________ did you invite?
A. Who else B. Who other C. Who others D. Who
（ ）8. Your idea ___________ right.
A. sounds B. hears C. listens D. looks
（ ）9. It __________ him five minutes to walk to school every day.
A. spends B. takes C. costs D. has
（ ）10. There is a bridge __________ the river. ____________ when you cross the bridge.
A. on / Careful B. over / Careful C. over / Be careful D. on / Be carefully
（ ）11. Simon often goes to school _________.
A. by a bike B. takes a bus C. on his bike D. by foot
（ ）12. My brother often wants ___________ his homework every day.
A. help with B. to help with C. help do D. to help with
（ ）13. ____ Summer Palace is _____ biggest one in _____ Beijing.
A. The, a, the B. The, the, / C. /, the, / D. /, a, /
（ ）14. __________ beef are there in the shop?
A. How many kilos of B. How much C. How much kilo D. How many
（ ）15. The film yesterday was very exciting, __________?
A. was he B. was it C. wasn’t he D. wasn’t it
IV. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (10%)
1. My house is quite big. There are at ________ (little) 12 rooms in it. It means that there are ________ (many) than 12 rooms in it.
2. Today we will learn the __________ (twenty-three) lesson. Are you ready for it?
3. That happened in the _______ (twenty) century. Few people knew what happened.
4. There ________ (be) lots of ham in his bag. Please ___________ (have) one of them.
5. Zhouzhuang is a nice place ___________ (visit)
6. There is always much housework for her _________ (do) on Saturdays.
7. We shall _______ (get) there at 7 a.m. ________ (enjoy) a full day there.
V. 句型转换 (14%)
1. He usually goes to Beijing by car. (改同义句)
He usually _______ ______ ________ ________ Beijing.
2. All of them live in such a place. (同上)
All of them live ______ a ________ ________ ________.
3. My daughter enjoyed herself in the zoo. (同上)
My daughter ______ a good ________ in the zoo.
4. There isn’t a student in the classroom. (同上)
There ______ ______ student in the classroom.
5. The boy on the balcony is our monitor. (根据划线部分提问)
_____________________________________________________________________________
VI. 完成句子 (21%)
1. 西蒙坐在米莉的前面。他们都坐在教室的前面。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 阳朔又漂亮又安静，但天经常下雨。
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 昨天雨一直下到晚上十点。
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 老师说我们不必在课堂上完成作业。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 假如你喜欢艺术品，这是一个好去处。
______________________________________________________________________________
6. 他们大多数人住在北京的其他地区。
______________________________________________________________________________
7. 我昨天花了四十分钟到达那家博物馆。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完型填空 (10%)
Fire（火）can help people in many ways. But it can also be very harmful (有害的). Fire can keep your house ___1___, give light and cook food. But fire can burn（燃烧）things __2__ . Big fire can burn trees, houses, animals or people.
Nobody knows how people began to use fire. But there are __3__ interesting old stories about how a man or woman started a fire. One is __4__ a man. The man __5__ a very long time ago. He went up the sun and __6__ fire down.
Today people know how to make a fire with matches(火柴). Children sometimes __7__ to play with them. But matches can be very dangerous. One match can burn a piece of paper, and __8__ it could burn a house. A small fire can turn a big fire very quickly. So you __9__ be careful with matches.
Be careful with fire, and it will __10__ you. But if you aren’t careful with fire, it may hurt you.
( ) 1．A． warm B． warmer C． cool D． cooler
( ) 2．A． also B． too C． either D．neither
( ) 3．A． many B． much C． little D． no
( ) 4．A． over B． about C． a little D． no
( ) 5．A． worked B． studied C．learned D． lived
( ) 6．A． bring B． take C． brought D． took
( ) 7．A． enjoy B． like C．don't like D． become
( ) 8．A． after B． late C． yet D．then
( ) 9．A ．can B． may C． will D． must
( ) 10．A． help B． do C． tell D． hope
VIII. 阅读理解：
(A)
Last month Joe Black, coach（教练）of a football team, and his family went to a small town for their holiday. One rainy afternoon, they couldn’t go out to have fun, so the family went to the cinema. Joe, his wife and their three daughters walked down to the town’s only cinema, bought tickets and went into the cinema. The lights were still on, and there were just six other people there. As Joe walked in, some of them saw him and started clapping（鼓掌）.
Joe gave them a smile and turned to his wife, “Aha, I can’t believe that they know me and they are giving me a warm welcome here,” he said, “I guess they saw my games on TV.”
They sat down and them a young man came up to Joe and gave out his hand. “Thanks a lot,” said Joe, “ I just can’t believe that you know me.” The young man said, “ I only know that they will not show（放映） the film until at least ten people buy tickets.”
( ) 1. How many people were there in Joe’s family?
A. Five B. Three C. Six D. Ten
( ) 2. How many cinemas could they find in the small town?
A. Three B. Only one C. Four D. We don’t know
( ) 3. Joe was ____________ when some people warmly greeted（打招呼）him.
A. worried B. unhappy C. sad D. pleased
( ) 4. Now with Joe’s family there were ________ people in the cinema.
A. nine B. eleven C. ten D. twelve
( ) 5. In fact the people in the cinema greeted Joe because ___________________.
A. they often saw him on TV B. they could shake（握手）hands with him
C. with his family they could see the film D. they knew him
(B)
A friend of mine was fond of drawing horses. He drew the horses very well, but he always began at the tail. Now it is the Western rule to begin at the head of the horse, that is why I was surprised. But what struck me was that it could not really make any difference whether the artist begins at the head or the tail or the belly or the foot of the horse, if he really knows his business. And most great artists who really know their business do not follow other people’s rule. They make their own rules. Every one of them does his work in a way peculiar to himself; and the peculiarity means only that he finds it much easier to work in that way.
Now the very same thing is true to literature. And the question “How shall I begin?”only means that you want to begin at the head instead of beginning at the tail or somewhere else. That is, you are not yet experienced enough to trust your own powers. When you become more experienced you will never ask the question, and I think that you will often begin at the tail --- that is to say, you will write the end of the story before you have even thought of the beginning.
( ) 6. A friend of the writer’s drew the horses ______________.
A. not very well B. in the way of western rule
C. in the way of his own rule D. all of the above
( ) 7. The writer was surprised NOT because _________________________.
A. the artist began to draw at the head of the horse
B. the artist began to draw at the tail of the horse
C. the artist made his own rule
D. the artist did not follow other people’s rule
( ) 8. You are not yet experienced because _______________________.
A. you don’t know where to begin
B. you want to begin at the head instead of beginning at the tail
C. you always asked questions
D. you do not trust your own powers
( ) 9. When you become more experienced you ___________________.
A. will never ask questions.
B. will often begin at the tail
C. should write the end of the story first
D. should think of the beginning
( )10. The topic of the passage is ________________.
A. how to draw a horse B. how to writer a story
C. how to make your own rules D. trust your own powers
Unit3—4
重 点 词 组
swim across the pool 横游过泳池 have to 不得不
get out of the car 走出车子 grow large teeth 长着巨大的牙齿
drive away 开走 run out of the building 跑出大楼
run away 逃跑 jump out of the van 跳出货车
at once 立刻 three men in police uniform三个穿警服的人
take different routes 走不同的路线 take another route 走另一条路
be surprised to do 惊讶地做某事 stop at the traffic lights 在交通灯处停下
catch them in the end 最后抓住他们 turn right / left 左转或右转
stop talking 停止交谈 at a crossroads 在十字路口
walk / go along 6th Street沿着第六大街走 zebra crossing 人行横道
walk / go straight on 一直朝前走 the corner of the road 街道拐角处
cross the road 穿马路 go through a tunnel 穿过隧道
walk around the table 绕着桌子走 walk down the stairs / steps走下楼梯/台阶
jump over the chair 从椅子上跳过 railway station 火车站
live up to… 活到… walk over / cross the bridge走过桥
the way to …… 去某地的路 a bridge over a small river小河上的一座桥
take her dog with her 带着她的狗 walk towards the bridge 朝桥走
win the game 赢得比赛 see the doctor 看病
start a campfire 生篝火 walk past the station 路过车站
a farewell party 一个告别会 half of the students 半数的学生
have a barbecue 吃烧烤 invite …… to …… 邀请某人做某事
have a picnic 野餐 complete the note 完成这张便条
the route to …… 去某地的路线 amazing things 令人惊奇的东西
as usual 像往常一样 travel by rocket 乘火箭旅行
in Africa 在非洲 at the same time 同时
keep your eyes open 使你的眼睛睁着 walk on tiptoe 踮着脚走
anything unusual 任何不同寻常的东西 sleep with their eyes open睁着眼睡觉
turn around 转身 show them the ghost 给他们看鬼
be frightened 害怕 hear a strange noise 听到奇怪的声音
float in water 在水里漂浮 run into 闯入
say to oneself 自言自语 tell somebody everything 告诉别人每件事
the animal centre 动物中心 take care of / look after 照顾
the following Sunday 下个周日 be fond of music 喜欢音乐
be not afraid any more 不再害怕 soft noise 柔和的声音
be crazy about 为… 疯狂 kick a stone or a can 踢石头或罐头
cartoon films 卡通电影 wake up early 早点醒来
a hard-working student 一个勤奋的学生 be poisonous 有毒
a baby panda show 一个小熊猫展览 at birth 在出生时
take turns to do… 轮流做某事 fact sheets 资料单
push off 推动 the tallest man in history历史上最高的人
in the daytime 在白天 the weight of 6 elephants六头大象的重量
eat 100 pounds of grass 吃100磅的草
return ……to the museum guide 把…还到博物馆的图书馆
smell things as well as dogs can 能像狗一样嗅觉灵敏
understand more about animals 更多地了解动物
remember your words about tortoises 记住你关于乌龟的话
the biggest living animals on land 陆上活着的最大的动物
in the back of elephants’ feet 在象腿的背部
walk in the mud easily 在泥地里轻松的行走
try to open the door with a knife 尝试用小刀打开后门
push them in the back of a van 把他们推进货车后面
ask them about the robbers 向他们询问小偷的事
walk from the sofa to the window 从沙发走到窗户
at the other side of the park 在公园的另一边
take the second turning on the right 在第二个拐弯处向右转
hear a whisper from the bushes 从灌木丛听到低语
make a sound like a whisper 发出一个低语似的声音
have enough poison to kill 有足够的毒可杀死
语 法 精 讲
1. 移动的方向介词（Prepositions of movement）
1) 常用的移动方向介词（词组）
成反义词：down---up, from---to, into---out of, off---on
有关联的：across---over, across---through---past, down---along
其他：onto, round
2) 使用时的注意点
A. across和over：这两个单词都可以用在“过桥”时，walk across/over the bridge，
over还可以表示“越过”，climb over the hill, jump over the chair, fly over；
B. across和through：这两个单词都表示“穿过”，但across是“从表面横穿”,
而through是“从内部穿过”， swim across the river, go across the street / playground,
climb through the window, walk through the forest（森林）；
C． up和down是反义词，up表示“向上”，down表示“向下”。
除此之外down还可以表示“沿着”，和along意思相同。
如：The boy likes going up and down by lift.
Walk down/along the road.
D. off和on常用的词组：get off（下车）；get on（上车）
E. past和pass：这两个词都表示“经过（并不进入）”，past是介词而pass是动
词。 如：pass the house= go / walk past the house
类似的有across和cross，go across the street= cross the street
F. round（英式英语）和around（美式英语）：意思用法基本一样，都表示“环绕”。如：Walk round the corner. = Walk around the corner.
2.一般将来时（Simple Future Tense）
一般将来时用来表示将来发生的动作或情况。
1) 三种结构
A. will +动词原形
B. shall （用于第一人称）+动词原形
C. be going to +动词原形。 如：He will play cards with his brother this evening. I will meet my friends in the park tomorrow.
She is going to visit her uncle next Monday.
2) 否定句和疑问句
A. 否定句：will / shall + not + do（缩略形式won’t / shan’t + do）
am / is / are + not + going to + do
B. 疑问句；Will / Shall + 主语 + do；Am / Is / Are +主语 + going to do
3) 常用的时间词或短语
A. 由tomorrow组成的，如：tomorrow morning / evening, the day after tomorrow;
B. 由next组成的，如：next Tuesday/month;
C. 由this组成的，如：this afternoon/evening;
D. 由coming组成的，如：the coming Sunday;
▲注：这些时间词或短语的前面都不能加时间介词。
E. 由in组成的，如：in two hours, in a few days, in the future.
4)will / shall和be going to的区别
A. will/shall表示纯粹的将来或现在正在制定的计划，如：Shall we meet at 2 o’clock?
B. be going to表示近来某个时间已制定好的计划，更强调主观意愿，如：
They are going to have a class meeting this Thursday.
也可表示根据某种迹象在最近或将来很有可能发生的事，如：
I am afraid that it’s going to rain later.
5)几个注意点
A. shall和will还可以表示征求对方意见或询问一个情况，如：
Shall I open the window? Will you go shopping with me tonight?
B. Will you (please) …表示客气地请求或邀请，意思是“请您……好吗?”如：
Will you please close the door? It’s so cold outside.
▲Would you (please) …? 与Will you (please) …?
用法相同，只是在语气上更加客气、婉转，
如：Would you please tell me the way to the railway station?
6) There be 句型的将来时
There will be + 名词 / There be going to be + 名词，如：
There will be a sports meeting in my school.
= There is going to be a sports meeting in my school.
There will be three football matches next week.
= There are going to be three football matches next week.
▲第一个be动词由后面的名词决定，单数和不可数用is，复数用are，第二个be动词不变。
7) 在英语中，有些动词如go, come, leave, arrive, fly, move, die等可用现在进行时表示将要发生的动作，如：a. Where are you going this afternoon? b. The bus is coming.
8) 在含有条件状语从句或时间状语从句的复合句中，从句用一般现在时，主句用将来时（用will而不用be going to），如：I will go to Beijing if he goes there.
When you turn left into 5th Street, you will see the theatre.
▲简而言之，紧跟在if, when, before, after等词后面的句子是从句，虽然在上两句中 “he goes there”和“you turn left into 5th Street”都是未发生的动作，但在这里要用一般现在时，而另一个短句仍用将来时。
3. 感叹句（Expressions with ‘What’ and ‘How’）
用以表示喜怒哀乐等强烈感情的句子叫做感叹句。句末常用感叹号，一般读作降调。通常由感叹词what或how构成，将what或how置于句首，后面跟它所修饰的词，即构成感叹句。
1)感叹句的结构
A. 通常；What / How + 被强调部分 + 其他成分
B. 具体：What + a/an + 形容词 + 可数名词单数 + （主语 + 谓语动词）！
What + 形容词 + 可数名词复数 + （主语 + 谓语动词）！
What + 形容词 + 不可数名词 + （主语 + 谓语动词）！
How + 形容词/副词 + （主语 + 谓语动词）！
如：What a beautiful flower (it is)! What beautiful flowers (they are)!
What hard work (it is)! How beautiful the flower is!
How beautiful (it is)! How beautiful the flowers are!
How beautiful (they are)! How carefully the boy is listening!
2) 几个注意点
A. 写感叹句时先要区分强调的对象，是形容词、副词，还是名词。强调形容词和副词的用how，强调名词的用what，然后再将主谓结构置于最后。如：
多么可爱的一个小女孩啊！（强调名词“女孩”，用what）
What a lovely girl! （后面可再加主谓结构she is）
这个女孩是多么可爱啊！（强调形容词“可爱”，用how）
How lovely! （后面可再加主谓结构the girl is）
▲what引导的感叹句有时甚至可以非常简化，在不同的上下文中表达不同的意思，如：What a day! （可以表示非常好，也可以表示非常坏，视上下文而定）
B. 感叹句可以从陈述句变化而来，同时也可以用陈述句来检验其是否正确，如：
多旧的一个书包啊！（先写陈述句“这是一个旧书包”，然后将what / how置于句首，写上被强调部分“一个旧书包”，最后加上主谓结构）
It is an old schoolbag. → What an old schoolbag! → What an old schoolbag it is!
Or: It is an old schoolbag. → How old. → How old the bag / it is!
他多么认真地听老师讲课啊！（这句由于被强调部分是副词carefully,所以只能用how）
He is listening to the teacher carefully. → How carefully! → How carefully he is listening to the teacher!
▲感叹句不是问句，所以主谓不要倒装；正确的感叹句都能还原成陈述句。
C. what的感叹句中要注意不可数名词，如work, weather, news, music, beef等；还要注意a /an的用法。
What fine weather (it is)! What good news (it is)!
What an honest boy! What interesting work!
4. 所有格（Noun + ’s）
它表示名词之间的所有关系，一般用’s形式表示。
1) 构成
A. 不以-s结尾的单数名词的所有格，直接在词尾加“’s”，读音与名词变复数相同，如：her mother’s name;
B. 不以-s结尾的复数名词的所有格，直接在词尾加“’s”，读音与名词变复数相同，如：Women’s Day;
C. 以-s结尾的复数名词的所有格，只在词尾加“’”，读音不变，如：the teachers’ office;
2) 注意点
A. 如果某事物为两人共有，则在第二个名词后面加“’s”表示所有关系，所有格后面的名词是单数，如：Lily and Lucy’s bedroom（两人共拥一个卧室）， Li Lei and Li Ming’s father（两人是亲兄弟，同一个父亲）
B. 如果某事物为两人分别所有，则在每一个名词后面加“’s”表示所有关系，所有格后面的名词是复数，如：Lily’s and Lucy’s bedrooms（两人分别有自己的卧室），Li Lei’s and Li Ming’s fathers（两人分别有各自的父亲）
5. Don’t be afraid. 不要害怕。
be afraid of something / doing something的意思为“害怕某物或做某事”。如：
He is afraid of staying at home alone.
6. The Zoo is north of Beijing Sunshine Secondary School.
动物园在北京阳光中学的北面。
A + be + 方位 + of + B的意思是“A在B的某个方位”。如：
His house is south of mine. 他的房子在我房子的南面。
Suzhou is west of Shanghai. 苏州在上海的西面。
7. It worked. 奏效了。
work表示“起作用，运转”，如：The machine worked.
反义词为fail, 表示“不起作用，失败”，如：Paul tried to open the door but failed.
8. stop talking 停止讲话
stop doing的意思是“停止正在做的事”；stop to do的意思是“停下来做另一件事”。如：
He was tired and stopped to have a rest. 他累了停下来休息一下。
He was so excited that he couldn’t stopping jumping up and down.
他是那么的兴奋以致于不停地上下跳着。
9. Can you tell me the way to …? 你能告诉我去…的路吗？
其他几种问路的表达方式
1）Where is …? 2）Which is the way to …?
3）Can / Could you tell me which is the way to …? 4）Can / Could you tell how to get to …?
5）Can / Could you tell how I can get to …?
10. It takes 10-12 days to travel from Earth to the Moon by rocket.
乘火箭从地球飞到月亮要花10至12天。
句型“It takes somebody some time to do something”，做某事花某人多长时间，如：
It took me two hours to do homework yesterday.
It will take the workers half a year to build the house.
11. Fish sleep wit their eyes open. 鱼睁着眼睛睡觉。
with their eyes open 是伴随状态，补充说明前面的动作。 如：
The teacher came into the classroom with a book in his hand.
12. could not see anything unusual 没看到什么不同寻常的东西
形容词用在不定代词（something, anything, nothing等）后面，如：
There is nothing important in today’s newspaper. 今天报纸上没什么重要的东西。
Could you show me something cheaper? 你能给我看一些便宜点的东西吗？
典 例 解 析
1. ________ a bag on his back, the farmer got on the bus.
A. There is B. Be C. Has D. With
2. After reading the book, we learned __________ about amazing things.
A. many B. much C. a lot of D. lots of
3. He goes to school __________ every day.
A. takes a bus B. by a bus C. on a bus D. in a bus
综 合 练 习 (A)
III. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1.Walk ______ the road, and you will see another red building on the other side of the road.
A. across B. cross C. around D. over
( ) 2. _______________ you going to bring us something to eat?
A. Are B. did C. Do D. does
( ) 3. Uncle Wang mended the radio for us, but it still didn’t ____________.
A. work B. working C. works D. worked
( ) 4. She _______________ meet us at the railway station tomorrow afternoon.
A. is B. is going C. is going to D. is going to do
( ) 5. There are five ____________ students in our school.
A. thousand B. thousands C. thousands of D. thousand of
( ) 6. She told me something ________ her birthday party on our way home.
A. on B. with C. of D. about
( ) 7. A cat likes sleeping ____ the daytime and catching a mouse ____ night.
A. at / in B. in / in C. in / at D. at / at
( ) 8. How much did you _______ on the e-dog?
A. pay B. cost C. spend D. buy
( ) 9. Haikou is ___ beautiful city. It’s ____ capital of Hainan and ____ city is by the sea.
A. a / the / a B. the / the / a C. a / the / the D. the / a / the
( ) 10. He is going to take ______ route when he escapes.
A. other B. another C. the other D. others
( ) 11. He and his mother _____ going to buy some beef. ______ we buy some, too?
A. are / Shall B. is / Will C. will / Shall D. will / Will
( ) 12. My wife and I often walk ______ the river after supper every day.
A. on B. along C. at D. in
( ) 13. He is such a good boy that he often helps the old go _______ the road.
A. cross B. through C. across D. over
( ) 14. My cousin is only 6 months old. ______ lovely he is!
A. What B. How C. What a D. How a
( ) 15. Everyone thinks he is a very _________ student.
A. work hard B. hard work C. hard-working D. working hard
IV. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (10%)
1. Those are not ________ clothes. They are my sister’s. _______ are on my bed. (I )
2. A baby panda is only 100 grams at _________ (birthday).
3. I think the _________ (danger) animal in the world is mosquitoes.
4. Mary is telling us a __________ (fun) story.
5. Is this ____________ ( you) English book? No, it’s not _____________ (I).
6. Please listen to the tape __________ (care).
7. What beautiful __________ (frog)!
8. Susan found a purse on ___________ (she) way home yesterday.
V. 句型转换 (11%)
1. We’d better go there by bus.（改为同义句）
1) We’d better ______ the bus there. 2) We’d better go there ______ the bus.
2. Finally the police caught them at the traffic lights. （改为同义句）
The police caught them at the traffic lights ______ ______ ______.
3. The man used a knife to open the door. （改为同义句）
The man _______ the door ________ a knife.
4. What will he do next week?（用be going to结构改写）
______________________________________________________________________________
5. What a wonderful game it is!（用how改写）
______________________________________________________________________________
VI. 完成句子 (24%)
1． 我们将于放学后在公园见面。
______________________________________________________________________________
2． 你妈妈在厨房中烧饭吗？不，她在打扫我们的卧室。
______________________________________________________________________________
3． 别害怕，跟我走。
______________________________________________________________________________
4． 有些人在白天睡觉，有些人在晚上睡觉。
______________________________________________________________________________
1． 他很惊讶地看着我们。
______________________________________________________________________________
2． 多么美丽的花啊！
______________________________________________________________________________
3． 在第二个转弯处向右转。
______________________________________________________________________________
4． 我们昨天没有乘公交车去公园。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完型填空 (10%)
When Mary was fourteen, her mother gave her a beautiful ring 1 her birthday present and Mary was very 2_ . But a week 3 , Mary lost her ring 4_ she was working in the kitchen. She looked for it but she 5 find it. She got sad.
That evening, her brother, Peter, was eating some cakes. Mary made all the nice cakes and Peter liked to eat the cakes. He ate and ate, then suddenly he stopped 6 . He opened his mouth and took out 7 . It was a ring.
“My ring!” Mary was so happy 8 see it again. She went to the kitchen and washed it, and then she thanked her brother.
“Thank you very much for 9 my ring,” she said to her brother. “I’ll cook some 10_ cakes for you.”
( ) 1. A. for B. with C. to D. in
( ) 2. A. happily B. happy C. angry D. angrily
( ) 3. A. late B. after C. later D. before
( ) 4. A. if B. because C. that D. when
( ) 5. A. couldn’t B. mustn’t C. needn’t D. can’t
( ) 6. A. eat B. eating C. to eat D. ate
( ) 7. A. hard something B. hard anything C. something hard D. anything hard
( ) 8. A. that B. for C. at D. to
( ) 9. A. finding B. find C. found D. to find
( )10.A. two B. another C. any D. more
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
One day a poor man was cutting（砍）a big piece of wood near a river. Suddenly his old axe(斧子)fell into the water. He felt very sad because he lost his only axe. Then all at once a beautiful fairy(仙女) came out and asked the man what happened.
"I have lost my axe," he said. "It fell into the water when I was cutting the wood."
The fairy showed him a gold(金) axe and asked, "Is this yours?"
"No," said the man.
The fairy then showed him a silver(银) axe and asked again, "Is this yours?" "No," again answered the man.
Then she showed him the old axe.
"Yes, that is mine," called out the happy man.
"I know it well enough," said the fairy. "I only wanted to see if you would tell me the truth（事实）, and now I'll give you the gold axe and the silver axe besides your own one."
( ) 1. One day when the man was cutting something, ______.
A. he fell into the water B .his axe dropped into the river
C. his axe fell into a lake D. he saw a beautiful fairy
( ) 2. The man was sad because ______.
A. he was poor and had no other axes B. he could not go on working
C. he liked his axe very much D. his axe was a gold axe
( ) 3. The fairy gave him a gold axe and a silver axe but he didn't take them. Because he _____________________.
A. did not like them B. did not know they were made of gold and silver
C. was very rich D. knew these axes were not his
( ) 4. At the end of the story the man had ______.
A. only one axe B. two axes C. three axes D. many axes
( ) 5. The fairy helped the man because he was ______ man.
A. an old B. a young C. a poor D. an honest
(B)
Mary, a young woman, had a little white sheep. She loved it very much. In the daytime she tied(系) it to a tree to let it eat grass in the fields and in the evening she went to take it back home. One evening she found someone had cut the rope(绳子) and the sheep was no longer in the fields. When her husband came back from work, she told him what had happened. At once her husband started to look for the sheep. He went around the small village, but the sheep couldn't be found. The next day Mary's husband heard that one of his neighbours, Aleco, had bought a sheep." Maybe Aleco has stolen(偷) our sheep, "he said to himself. But when he got to Aleco's house, he found he had made a mistake(犯错误). In front of Aleco's house there was a black sheep. At that time it started to rain. He had to stay in Alceo's house. When he came outside after the rain stopped, he was surprised to find that the white sheep was standing before him. Aleco had dyed(染)its wool black. Now it had been washed clean by the rain.
6. Mary loved the white sheep, so she tied it to the tree. ( )
7. She let the sheep eat the grass in the fields from morning to evening. ( )
8. When Mary's husband arrived at Aleco's house he saw a black sheep. ( )
9. He had to stay in Aleco's house because it was raining. ( )
10. The rain helped him to find the sheep. ( )
综 合 练 习 (B)
I. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1. Xingjiang is in the ____________ of China.
A. northwest B. northeast C. southwest D. southeast
( ) 2. She is too young. She is afraid of ____________ at home by herself.
A. stay B. staying C. to stay D. to staying
( ) 3. ___________ , we caught the thief at the corner of the street.
A. At the end B. In the end C. At first D. In the last
( ) 4. He is quickly walking _____ the stairs and climbed______ his car and drove away.
A. down / on B. up / on C. down / in D. down / into
( ) 5. A kangaroo needs its tail for _________.
A. pushing B. pushing off C. push D. push off
( ) 6. Can you hear a whisper? It _________ a small cat.
A. sound B. sounds C. sound like D. sounds like
( ) 7. _________ interesting news it is!
A. What B. What an C. How D. How an
( ) 8. These are ___________ cars. They are very beautiful.
A. Mr. Yang’s and Mrs. Yang’s B. Mr. Yang and Mrs. Yang’s
C. Mr. Yang’s or Mrs. Yang’s D. Mr. Yang’s and Mrs. Yang
( ) 9. Excuse me, could you tell me ________ get to the railway station?
A. how to B. where is C. the way to D. how can I
( ) 10. The train will go _____ a plain(平原) first, and then it‘ll go ______ some tunnels.
A. through / across B. across / through C. into / on D. up / down
( ) 11. Mrs. Cai will go to Chongqing with her son __________ tomorrow.
A. take a plane B. by air C. on plane D. by a plane
( ) 12. The River Seine flows（流淌）_________ Paris, the capital of France.
A. over B. through C. cross D. across
( ) 13. “You’d better write down ________ taught in class,” Mr. Sun said to the students.
A. useful something B. nothing useful C. everything useful D. useful everything
( ) 14. We have to ______ these fact sheets of the museum _____ the museum guide.
A. return / back to B. return / to C. give / to D. put / back to
( ) 15. Elephants can move ________ because walk on tiptoe.
A. quite B. quiet C. quietly D. quietly
IV. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (10%)
1. “Oh, here it is!” Andy said to ___________ (he).
2. The work is too hard. You can not do it __________ (easy).
3. Man can’t live __________ (with) air or water.
4. Jim always gets to school early. It’s __________ (usual) for her to be late.
5. Please give _________ (they) a talk.
6. Mike lives _________ (near) in Sunshine Town.
7. The dinner ________ (taste) bad. Who ________ (make) it?
8. We ______ (go) on a trip if it _______ (not rain) next week.
V. 句型转换 (14%)
1. Is the schoolbag yours? （改为同义句）
_____ the schoolbag __________ _________ _________ ?
2. I knew the news after he told me. （改为同义句）
I ______ know the news _______ he told me.
3. There is nobody in the playground now. （改为同义句）
There _______ ________ in the playground now.
4. Shall we take a train to Shanghai? （改为同义句）
________ ________ going to Shanghai _______ _________?
5. The boy in white is listening to the teachers carefully.（改为感叹句）
______________________________________________________________________________
VI. 完成句子 (21%)
1. 请轮流朗读这些生词。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 鱼睁着眼睛睡觉吗？
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 这个声音听起来像音乐。
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 那个劫匪跳出火车，跑掉了。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 有些人能活到100岁。
______________________________________________________________________________
6. 多么好吃的面包啊！
______________________________________________________________________________
7. 这个男孩看起来多么强壮啊！
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完型填空 (10%)
When you have a post office box（邮箱）, the postman（邮递员） does not bring letters to you, but you have to go to the __1__ and get your letters from your box. The box is locked（锁住的）, and you have the key, so the letters are quite __2__.
One day Mr. Stone wrote to the post office and __3__for a post office box for himself. He soon got an answer to this letter. It __4__, “We will give you a box __5__one week.”
Two weeks later, Mr. Stone wrote to the post office __6__, “Why haven’t I got a post office box yet?”
Three weeks 7 , there was still no news. Mr. Stone got so __8__that he went to the post office and asked why. The office worker said, “We have written two letters to you and told you to come and get the __9__ to your box, but you didn’t come.”
“Where are the letters?”
“We sent__10__ to your box.”
( ) 1. A. school B. post office C. station D. postman
( ) 2. A. strong B. good C. safe D. long
( ) 3. A. asked B. went C. phoned D. said
( ) 4. A. told B. spoke C. talked D. said
( ) 5. A. in B. for C. after D. before
( ) 6. A. then B. again C. clearly D. already
( ) 7. A. late B. later C. after D. ago
( ) 8. A. happy B. angry C. hungry D. glad
( ) 9. A. key B. letters C. much D. box
( ) 10. A. ours B. you C. it D. them
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Dear Earthmen
I have enjoyed stay on your interesting unusual planet. I think I understand the life on earth now and I would like to give you my impressions.
First of all, you live in boxes. Every morning you leave your big boxes and get into your smaller boxes on wheels. All these small boxes race around and around, and finally stop to rest. You then leave these boxes on wheels and go to very large tall boxes.
After resting all day you get back into your little boxes and return to your big boxes. There you sit and stare at very small glowing boxes with moving pictures on the front.
Only one thing puzzled me. One day, 1 went to watch a football game. A group of angry boys fought over a round small ball Everyone shouted but they kept on fighting. They were angry, I suppose, about being shut up in boxes all day.
Thank you earthmen for this chance to get to know you,
Gratefully,
The man from Mars.
( ) 1. Your "interesting unusual planet" means ______________ .
A. the earth B the moon C the sun D. Mars
( ) 2. "Big boxes" means ____________.
A. large wooden boxes for goods B streets
C. houses where people live D. factories
( ) 3. "Smaller boxes on wheels" refers to(指代)________
A. toys B. house that can be moved
C. bicycles D. trolleys, buses and cars
( ) 4. "Very large tall boxes'" refers to _______________,
A. high buildings B. fixed boxes that can't be moved
C. Large high buses D. trains
( ) 5. "Very small glowing boxes" refers to _______________.
A.TV sets B. radios C. films D. theatres
(B)
A traveler came out of the airport. There were a lot of taxis. He asked every taxi-driver his name. Then he took the third one. It cost 5 dollars from the airport to the hotel. “How much does it cost for the whole day?” the man asked. “100 dollars,” said the taxi-driver. This was very expensive, but the man said it was OK.
The taxi-driver took the man everywhere. He showed him all the parks and museums（博物馆） in the city. In the evening they went back to the hotel. The traveler gave the taxi-driver 100 dollars and said, “What about tomorrow?” The taxi-driver looked at the man and said, “Tomorrow? It’s another 100 dollars.” But the man said, “That’s OK! See you tomorrow.” The taxi-driver was very pleased.
The next day the taxi-driver took the traveler everywhere again. They visited all the parks and museums again. And in the evening they went back to the hotel. The man gave the taxi-driver 100 dollars again and said, “I’m going home tomorrow.” The taxi-driver was sorry because he liked the traveler and above all（首先）, 100 dollars a day was a lot of money. “So you are going home. Where do you come from?” he asked. “I come from New York.” “New York!” said the taxi-driver, “I have a sister in New York. Her name is Susan. Do you know her?”
“Of course I know her. She gave me 200 dollars for you.”
( ) 6. Where did the traveler come from?
A. England B. America C. Canada D. France
( ) 7. Why did the traveler take the third taxi? Because ___________________.
A. the other taxi-drivers asked for more money
B. the third taxi-driver was a kind-hearted man
C .he didn’t want to spend his own money on the coming visit
D. the other drivers didn’t like to take him
( ) 8. Usually the cost of travelling one day by taxi may be ______________.
A.$100 B.$200 C. less than $100 D. more than $200
( ) 9. Who asked the traveler to give the money to the taxi-driver?
A. The traveler’s sister B. The traveler himself C. Nobody D. The driver’s sister
( ) 10. The driver was unhappy __________________.
A. when he heard the traveler’s last words
B. when the traveler asked every taxi-driver his name
C. when the traveler asked him for his sister’s name
D. during the two-day visit
Unit 5---6
重 点 词 组
be at home alone 独自在家 hear somebody Shouting 听到某人大叫
rush into 冲进去 hurt one’s leg 弄伤了腿
run back to her flat 跑回她的家 pour water over her jacket把水倒在夹克衫上
be in hospital 住院 help each other 互相帮助
by oneself 独自 sound dangerous 听起来很危险
your own safety 你自己的安全 be careful with matches 小心火柴
leave the stove on 让炉子开着 the Best Sportswoman Award最佳女运动员奖
this year’s Youth Award 本年度青少年奖 a super swimmer 一个游泳健将
fall into the water 跳入水中 be grateful for one’s help 感激某人的帮助
in the past 在过去 row a boat 划船
forget to bring a football忘记带足球 catch a fish 捕鱼
within five minutes 五分钟之内 think of others 考虑别人
lose the game 输了比赛 lose one’s way 迷路
do one’s best 尽力 be weak at geography 地理很薄弱
play the piano well 钢琴弹得好 have good grades in Chinese 语文成绩好
get into the school team 进入校队 get better results in 取得好成绩
have a good memory 记忆力好 No problem. 没问题
never mind 别介意 be thoughtful 考虑周全
parents’ meeting 家长会 hear from somebody 收到来信
be able to 能够 sleep on one’s lap 睡在膝盖上
hold it in my hand 把它拿在手里 feed the rabbit carrots 喂给兔子胡萝卜
chase / run after a ball 追赶球 with eyes open wide 眼睛睁得很大
do wonderful tricks 做精彩的把戏 look after him until the end 照顾他到永远
a rabbit hutch 兔笼 a fish tank 鱼缸
on top of a piano 钢琴的顶上 an open drawer 一只开着的抽屉
most of the time 大多数时候 make a lot of noise 发出许多声音
ring the doorbell 按门铃 a black and white tail 黑白相间的尾巴
look around for … 四处寻找…… take care of 照看……
get tired 感到累 frighten the cat 吓唬猫
take the dog for a walk 遛狗 brush the dog’s fur 给狗刷毛
all over our flat 遍及我公寓 bark a lot 经常叫
be busy at work all day 整天忙于工作 take … out of the water 从水里拿出来
listen to a talk on … 听一个…的讲座 look the same 看上去一样
keep the fish tank clean 鱼缸保持干净 bark at people 朝人们大叫
pieces of string 线团 keep the dog on a lead 把狗系在项圈里
make sure 务必 look beautiful in the sun 在阳光下看起来很美
build me camps out of sticks 用树棍帮我搭帐篷
organize class activities well 班级活动组织得好
put out the fire with a blanket 用毯子扑灭火
burn one’s neck and arms 烧伤脖子和胳膊
keep one’s life from danger 使某人的生命远离危险
keep long hair away from fire 使长发远离火
What happened to …? 发生了什么事
put something hot into the rubbish bin 把烫的东西扔进垃圾桶
recommend somebody for … Award 推荐某人为….奖
the Most Helpful Student Award 最乐于助人学生奖
collect things for Project Hope 为希望工程募集
visit a home for the elderly 参观老年之家
help somebody out of a fire 把某人救出火海
There’s a small chance that I will not play. 我不玩的可能性很小
It’s highly possible that I’ll go walking. 我很可能去散步
go walking instead of swimming 去散步而不去游泳
teach somebody how to dance 教某人如何跳舞
She isn’t any trouble. 她不惹麻烦
on the edge of the window-ledge 在窗台边缘
knock on the cage door with his beak 用喙敲鸟笼的门
put some stones at the bottom of the tank 把石头放鱼缸底部
语 法 精 讲
1. 情态动词can和could
1) 都能用来表示人拥有的某种能力，意思是“会，能”
A. can用在一般现在时，而could用在一般过去时，如：
I can swim now, but I could not swim when I was young.
B.在各种句型中要遵守情态动词的一般规则
肯定：can / could + do（动词原形，并且与人称和时态无关）
否定：cannot / could not + do （can的否定形式是cannot与can’t，一般不写成can not，could not的缩略形式是couldn’t）
疑问：Can / Could + 主语 + do
2) 都能用来表示事情发生的可能性，意思是“可能”
A. can用在一般现在时，而could用在一般过去时，如：
We can see a monkey show in the zoo today.
He could not play football yesterday because he didn’t bring his boots.
B. 在各种句型中也要遵守情态动词的一般规则
3) 其他相关用法
A. can还可表示“建议，请求”，常用Can I …? 或Can you …?等结构，如：
Can I help you? Can you give me a hand?
B. could用在现在时或将来时，也可表示“请求”，但语气比can客气委婉，如：
Could you lend me your bike?
C. could用在现在时或将来时，有时还可表示可能性不大，如：
Uncle Wang could come to our party this evening. （今晚会来，但可能性不大）
D. can和could还常被用在否定句和疑问句中，表示“猜测，惊异，怀疑”等，can表示对现在的猜测，而could表示对过去的猜测，如：
I saw Mr. Black at the school gate a few minutes ago. He can’t be in his office now.
（can’t表示“不可能”之意）
Can this smart child do such a stupid thing?
2. 情态动词may和might
当知道某事有可能发生后，我们就可以进一步讨论这件事情具体发生的几率。如果这件事情很有机会发生时，我们可以用may，若机会较小，我们就用might。
1) 两者都是情态动词，在各种句型中要遵守情态动词的一般规则
肯定：may / might + do（动词原形，并且与人称和单复数无关）
否定：may / might + not + do
疑问：May / Might + 主语 + do
2) may的用法
A. 表示“猜测”，用于现在和将来发生的事情，如：My father may not go to work today.
B. 表示“同意，许可”，或用在疑问句中表示“征得对方的许可”，如：
Boys and girls, you may open your eyes now.
--- May I come in? --- Yes, you may. / No, you may not. (or No, you mustn’t.)
▲ 在表示“不准，禁止”等意思时，常用must not / mustn’t来代替may not。
▲ 在对 “May I …?” 问句作肯定回答时，通常不用 “Yes, you may.”而用 “Yes, please / of course.或Certainly. 作否定回答时，常用 “Please don’t.”或 “No, you mustn’t.”
3) might的用法
A. 表示可能性小一些，对事情发生的可能有所怀疑，如：I might pass the exam tomorrow.
B. 也可表示“许可”，但语气较委婉客气些，如：
You might come and play with us if you would like.
C. 也可作为may的过去时，如：He was afraid he might go the wrong way.
3. 祈使句（Imperative sentence）
祈使句是表示请求、给予命令或指示的句子。它的主语是you（听话者），通常省略，把后面的谓语动词置于句首，并且谓语动词一律用原形。
1)祈使句的肯定形式
各种动词原形 + 宾语/表语/不加，如：Stand up, please. ；Pass it to me.；Be quiet.
2) 祈使句的否定形式
Do not / Don’t + 谓语动词原形，如：Don’t open the door, please.
Don’t sit down.
Don’t be late again.
▲ please可放句首或句尾，不影响动词和整句话。
3) 祈使句的反意疑问句
一般：祈使句，+ will you?（无论句首是什么动词，肯定或否定，都用will you）
特殊：Let’s 开头的祈使句，+ shall we?
Open the window, will you? Don’t open the window, will you?
Be quick, will you? Don’t be late for school, will you?
Let us play with snow, will you?（Let us只是对听话者所说，主语仍是you）
Let’s play with snow, shall we?（Let’s是表示第一人称的祈使句，包含说话者，所以主语是we）
▲ Let’s引导的祈使句，其否定形式为Let’s not … ，如：Let’s not have a rest.
4. 情态动词should, ought to和must
should和ought to都表示“应该，应当”，must表示“必须”或“肯定”。
1) should的用法
A. 在各种句型中要遵守情态动词的一般规则
肯定：should + 动词原形（与人称和时态无关）
否定：should + not + 动词原形
疑问：Should + 主语 + 动词原形
You should clean the rabbit hutch every day.
You should not get a pet if you don’t have enough time.
B.在第一人称的疑问句中表示询问对方的意愿，语气委婉，如：What should I do now?
2) ought to的用法
ought to比should语气强，带有责备或督促的意思。
肯定：ought to + 动词原形
否定：ought + not + to + 动词原形
疑问：Ought + 主语 + to + 动词原形
You ought to brush your cat often. You ought not to feed your dog at the table.
Ought we to clean the classroom right now?
3) must的用法
A. 在各种句型中要遵守情态动词的一般规则
肯定：must + 动词原形（与人称和时态无关）
否定：must + not + 动词原形
疑问：Must + 主语 + 动词原形
B. 否定形式有两个，分别为mustn’t（不准，禁止）和needn’t（不必），如：
You mustn’t play football in the street. It’s dangerous.（不应该，禁止）
--- May I take the fish out of water? --- No, you mustn’t.（不准，禁止）
You needn’t water this kind of flowers every day. （不必）
--- Must I finish the homework at school? --- No, you needn’t. （不必）
4) have to与must的意思相似，但have（不得不）强调客观，而must强调主观看法，如：
He must clean his bedroom now. He is a tidy man.（主观意愿）
He has to clean his bedroom now. His mother makes him do it.（客观外部的需要）
▲ have to能用于更多时态，如：
Yesterday I had to eat bread for supper because there was nothing else at home.
He will have to cook for himself tonight.
5) must还可以表示推测，用于肯定句，如：
The light is on. She must be in the room.（一定，大概）
▲ 它的否定形式就是前面提到的 “can’t”，意思是“不可能”。
5. Keep long hair away from fire. 使长发远离火。
keep … (away) from … 的意思是“使 … 远离 …”。如：
You should keep yourself away from danger.
Please keep your baby away from this kind of medicine.
典 例 解 析
1. My friend John is ill _________ now. I must go to the hospital to see him.
A. in the hospital B. in hospital C. at the hospital D. at hospital
2. It is Monday today. You _________ go to school.
A. has to B. should C. mustn’t D. needn’t
3. We look forward to _________ from you soon.
A. hear B. be hear C. hears D. hearing
4. I’m not feeling ________ this morning and my mother asks me to stay at home.
A. well B. good C. bad D. badly
综 合 练 习 (A)
III. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1. They walked _________ the gate with their teacher.
A. through B. across C. over D. after
( ) 2. The Japanese arrived __________ Beijing ________ a Sunday morning.
A. in / in B. on / at C. at / in D. in / on
( ) 3. Before 1990 there was no airline ___________ the two cities.
A. along B. in C. between D. among
( ) 4. My mother works ____ a hospital _______ my home.
A. in / at B. in / near C. on / near D. on / at
( ) 5. _______ does your brother do ? He’s a doctor.
A. What B. Who C. Where D. How
( ) 6. How ___________ fish do you want?
A. much B. many C. some D. any
( ) 7. It’s about ___________ kilometers from Suzhou to Nanjing.
A. two hundreds B. two hundreds of C. two hundred D. two hundred of
( ) 8. Daniel plays _________ and __________ very well.
A. the football / the piano B. football / the piano
C. football / piano D. the football / piano
( ) 9. I am good at Physics, but sometimes I’m __________.
A. polite B. brave C. careful D. careless
( ) 10. Don’t make such a big noise. I ________ the teacher clearly.
A. can listen B. can’t listen to C. can listen to D. can’t hear
( ) 11. Sandy knows a lot ________ Chinese history.
A. about B. of C. for D. to
( ) 12. It is Saturday today. I _______ go to school.
A. mustn’t B. needn’t C. doesn’t have to D. should
( ) 13. A cat has some _______ and four _______.
A. wings / legs B. fins / wings C. whiskers / paws D. scales / tails
( ) 14. It’s bad for our eyes to read _______ the sun.
A. with B. under C. in D. below
( ) 15. A tortoise walks _______ while a rabbit runs _________.
A. slow / fast B. a lot / little C. slowly / fast D. well / badly
IV. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (11%)
1. I think you ought to ______ (buy) your son a dog because he likes dogs very much.
2. He can swim well now. But he _________ (can not))do that last year.
3. She saw lots of ________ (smoke) from the next door.
4. Please ask your parents to the parents’ __________ (meet) this afternoon.
5. Mr. White is quite __________ ( friend) to all the people.
6. My mother is looking forward to _________ (see) you soon.
7. How much ________ (be) the erasers?
8. You’d better _______________ (not try) it again.
9. She always does homework _______________ (quick) than the other classmates.
10. The man in black often ___________ at home. I guess he must be a __________. (write)
V. 句型转换 (10%)
1. Many visitors brought her flowers and presents.（划线部分提问）
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. She has to stay in hospital for three months. （划线部分提问）
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. You mustn’t pull the rabbit’s ears.（改为祈使句）
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. It is necessary to give your rabbit clean water. （改为祈使句）
_____________________________________________________________________________
5. I spent two hours doing my homework last night.（改为同义句）
_____________________________________________________________________________
VI. 完成句子 （24%）
1. 请不要给兔子喂肉。
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. 我的猫三公斤重。
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. 王芳发生了什么事？
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. 昨天下午他用水把火扑灭了。
_____________________________________________________________________________
5. 谢谢你救了我的孩子。
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. 他得住院两个月。他太虚弱了。
_____________________________________________________________________________
7. 我们正期盼着收到你的来信。
_____________________________________________________________________________
8. 不要吓唬他。他害怕猫。
_____________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完型填空 (10%)
Blue Bear lives in a little house near a hill.
One spring, when it was time to plant his tomato plants, Blue Bear went to work in his new __1__. He planted each little plant in his garden carefully.
All the summer, he looked after the garden and __2__ the plants. Near the end of the summer, the potatoes were fat and red. Blue Bear picked quite a lot and took them into his little house. He thought, “Mmmm! I have tomatoes. Now it’s time to __3__ bread!”
With his pan（平底锅）he began to make bread. It __4__ him only a few minutes to finish it. The whole house was full of a wonderful smell. Then he cut the tomatoes and made a big sandwich.
He was so happy that he ran out __5__ the house, singing and jumping. And when he really felt a little __6__, he thought of his sandwich and went __7__ into his house. Just when he was taking up the sandwich, Mr White--- a dog came.
“__8__ I stay with you tonight?” I’m just too tired to walk on.”
“Yes, please!” answered Blue Bear, and __9__ each enjoyed half of the sandwich. Blue Bear was happy that he was __10__ to help someone who needed help.
( ) 1. A. house B. school C. city D. garden
( ) 2. A. pulled B. pushed C. watered D. made
( ) 3. A. eat B. drink C. cook D. buy
( ) 4. A. took B. had C. paid D. stayed
( ) 5. A. into B. near C. of D. with
( ) 6. A. happy B. worried C. angry D. hungry
( ) 7. A. by B. back C. past D. out
( ) 8. A. Must B. May C. Do D. Did
( ) 9. A. it B. she C. he D. they
( ) 10. A. sure B. able C. grateful D. quick
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Mr. Young lived by a lake. He wanted to move his house to the other side. It was winter and there was ice on the lake. Mr. Young thought, “ I’ll put my house on a big truck. Then I can drive it across the ice to the other side.”
The house was put on a big truck, and Mr. Young began driving the truck across the lake. When he was in the middle, he heard a crack. Then the ice broke! The truck and Mr. Young’s house sank to the bottom (底). Mr. Young was saved, but he had lost his house.
( ) 1. Mr. Young put his house on a ______.
A. car B. train C. truck D. plane
( ) 2. Mr. Young moved his house in the ______.
A. summer B. winter C. spring D. fall
( ) 3. Why did Mr. Young’s house sink in the lake?
A. Because it was winter. B. Because the ice was not very thick.
C. Because it sank to the bottom. D. Because it was too cold.
( ) 4. The best title (题目) is __________.
A. Mr. Young Loses His House B. Swimming at the lake
C. A Nice Drive D. Mr. Young Buys a House
( ) 5. “Then I can drive it across the ice to the other side.” The meaning of “across” is ______.
A. 在上面 B. 横穿 C. 冲过 D. 放置
(B)
“Ladies and gentlemen, this is your pilot speaking. I hope you are enjoying your flight to Milan this morning. Now we are passing over the nice city of Geneva, in the west of Switzerland. If you are sitting on the left hand side of the plane, you can see the city from the window. We are flying at 10,000 meters and we are flying at a speed of 700 km/h. I’m afraid the weather in Milan this morning is not very good. It’s raining and there’s a light wind blowing. Enjoy the rest of your flight. Thank you for flying with us today.”
( ) 6.They are flying to Milan ________.
A. in the evening B. in the morning C. at noon D. tomorrow
( ) 7. Geneva city is in the ______ part of Switzerland.
A. eastern B. northern C. western D. southern
( ) 8. They can see Geneva city _______ of the plane.
A. on the right side B. from the right window
C. next to Milan D. on the left side
( ) 9. The plane is flying _______ meters an hour at the moment.
A. one thousand (千) B. ten thousand
C. seven thousand D. seven hundred thousand
( )10.What’s the weather like in Milan this morning?
A. It’s rainy and windy. B. It’s very good.
C. It’s snowing and there’s a light wind. D. It’s nice and sunny.
综 合 练 习 (B)
I. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1. They say there ____________ a new film tomorrow evening.
A. is going to have B. will have C. has D. is going to be
( ) 2. There is __________ interesting on CCTV10. Try others.
A. nothing B. none C. anything D. no
( ) 3. _________ Lucy is singing the Japanese song!
A. What good B. What C. How D. How well
( ) 4. He ________ afraid if he is at home alone.
A. mays B. maybe C. may be D. may
( ) 5. If you don’t have enough time, you _________ have a dog.
A. ought to B. ought not to C. must D. mustn’t
( ) 6. The Palace Museum is a wonderful place for people _________.
A. to play B. to visit C. to look D. to take care
( ) 7. --- ________ I come here before 7 o’clock a.m.?
--- No, you needn’t. You may come later.
A. Will B. Must C. Shouldn’t D. Needn’t
( ) 8. I saw some girls _________ volleyball when I passed the playground.
A. played B. play C. to play D. playing
( ) 9. They arrived at the town ________ rainy Sunday afternoon.
A. on a B. in the C. in a D. on the
( ) 10. My mother came back from shopping just now. She went in _______ a new book in her hand.
A. has B. with C. buy D. like
( ) 11. He felt unhappy ________ the time at the party. Nobody talked to him.
A. none of B. no C. only little D. most of
( ) 12. He forgot ________ an umbrella with him yesterday. So he got all wet.
A. brought B. and bring C. to take D. took
( ) 13. My Maths was very poor. I need __________ to help me.
A. more exercises B. to more exercise C. to exercising D. many exercise
( ) 14. When he passed by, he heard his neighbour _________ for help.
A. calling B. call C. called D. to call
( ) 15. --- When did you start your work?
--- I ________ it until 11:50 p.m. I think I _______ finish it today.
A. started to do / can’t B. didn’t start to do / can
C. started do / can D. didn’t start to do / can’t
IV. 用所给单词的适当形式填空 (11%)
1. She lost the money on her way, so she is ________ (happy) now.
2. Tom didn’t give us any help. He is _________ (help).
3. Our classroom is a little smaller than _________ (they).
4. The _________ (visit) from the USA are happy to see the Great Wall.
5. When he _________ (get) tired, he will go to sleep.
6. On the way to school, he saw a dog and thought it might _______ (bite) him.
7. Cats are easy ____________ (look after).
8. Can these trees _______________ (plant) here?
9. There are a lot of _______________ (toy bear) in that supermarket.
10.The boy ___________ (swim) in the pool yesterday. I know he goes to the ___________(swim) lesson every Thursday.
V. 句型转换 (10%)
1. I put out the fire with a blanket. （划线部分提问）
______________________________________________________________________________
2. He may come to visit you this evening. （划线部分提问）
______________________________________________________________________________
3. His dog is not difficult to look after. I think so.(两句合并成一句)
______________________________________________________________________________
4. It is unnecessary to walk your dog every day. （改为祈使句）
______________________________________________________________________________
5. Snakes do not have ears. （改为同义句）
______________________________________________________________________________
六、中译英 (24%)
1. 一个八岁的女孩在上学的路上迷路了。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 他年纪太小，不能一个人独自在家。
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 它大多数时候睡在一直开着的抽屉里。
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 爸爸告诉我不要在太阳下看书。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 他正睁大眼睛在卧室里寻找他的手表。
______________________________________________________________________________
6. 去年美国经常下雪，所以他们有可能去滑雪。
______________________________________________________________________________
7. 年青时他的记忆力很好。
______________________________________________________________________________
8. 冬天猫喜欢睡在主人的膝盖上。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完型填空 (10%)
Mike was thirteen years old. He _ 1 a very good student. He _2 like doing his homework. He liked playing football, watching TV, skating and so on. _3 he didn’t do his homework on time(及时). _ 4 he did it, he often made a lot of mistakes.
One day, his Math teacher _ 5 Mike’s homework and _6 that he had got all his exercises right. He was very glad, but he was also very __ 7 .
He called Mike to his office and said to him, “You got all your homework right this time,
Mike. What happened? Did your mother help you?” Mike’s mother usually helped him _8 his homework. __9 the day before yesterday his mother wasn’t at home. So Mike answered, “No, sir. Mother was busy that day. So I had to do it _10 .”
( ) 1. A. isn’t B. doesn’t C. wasn’t D. didn’t
( ) 2. A. isn’t B. doesn’t C. won’t D. didn’t
( ) 3. A. Some time B. Sometime C. Some times D. Sometimes
( ) 4. A. Before B. Where C. After D. When
( ) 5. A. looked at B. looked C. saw D. found
( ) 6. A. found B. see C. to see D. seeing
( ) 7. A. happy B. surprised C. glad D. pleased
( ) 8. A. in B. with C. doing D. on
( ) 9. A. Then B. But C. Or D. And
( ) 10. A. mine B. myself C. himself D. ourselves
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
27th Olympic Games
No
Country
Gold
Silver
Bronze
Total
1
USA
39
25
33
97
2
Russia
32
28
28
88
3
China
28
16
15
59
4
Australia
16
25
17
58
5
Germany
14
17
26
57
6
France
13
14
11
38
7
Italy
13
8
13
34
8
Netherlands
12
9
4
25
9
Cuba
11
11
7
29
10
Britain
11
10
7
28
( )1. The USA was in first place with _______ medals more than Italy.
A. 47 B. 58 C. 63 D. 72
( )2. France got as many gold as ________.
A. Cuba B. Italy C. Germany D. Australia
( )3. How many gold medals did the ten countries get in all?
A. 161 B. 189 C. 162 D. 163
(B)
First Frenchman: I once heard someone shout, “Look out,” I put my head out of the window and a basin of water fell on me. It seems that “Look out” may mean “Don’t look out.”
Second Frenchman: Once I was on a ship and heard the captain(船长) shout, “All hands on deck,” I put my hands on the deck and someone walked on them.
( ) 4. “Look out” here means “_________”.
A. Put your head out of the window and look B. Help me
C. I’m going to pour the water D. Take care
( ) 5. “All hands on deck” means “__________”.
A. Put your right hand and left hand on deck B. Give your hands to me
C. All the sailors gather(集合) on deck D. Shake your hands with me
(C)
Swimmer Zhang Jian became the first Chinese person to swim across the English Channel early Monday morning as he successfully landed in Calais, France, after a 12-hour journey from Dover, Britain. At 1:25 a.m. (Beijing time), Zhang walked onto the French beach to the applause(掌声) of Chinese fans, tourists.
The 33.8-kilometer channel has attracted many swimmers because it is one of the most difficult to cross. The 37-year-old swimmer left Shakespeare Beach, Dover, at 1:30 p.m., Sunday to start his journey. A pilot ship guided him in the effort.
With special oil on his skin to help keep warm, Zhang Jian beat the cold current(水流) of 16°C and swam for 12 hours. He could only remain on the French sands for 10 minutes because he didn’t obtain a French visa. After a hearty but brief celebration, he boarded the pilot ship to return to Britain.
For much of the stunt, Zhang swam freestyle to save energy. But Zhang altered his style along the way because the ocean current changed every 6 hours and the water was so cold. Zhang changed to the breaststroke at about 9 p.m., in spite of expert warning that doing so would exhaust (消耗) him faster. Later he changed back to freestyle. Zhang stopped several times to take water and food.
About 3 three hours before he landed in Calais, a British guide jumped into the sea to accompany(伴随) him. At 67, the British swimmer was the second-oldest person to ever cross the English Channel when he did so 2 years ago. Zhang kept up with the rising tide helping him achieve his goal. Most Chinese news Internet sites and web portals covered Zhang’s exploits extensively. Internet users posted messages about the stunt as they watched the live broadcast on CCTV. “The spirit of adventure which has long been far away from the Chinese should come back to us,” said an Internet user. “Whether he succeeds or fails, he has given us something quite valuable,” said another online message.
( ) 6. The main idea of the passage is _________________.
A. Zhang Jian became the first Chinese person to swim across the English Channel.
B. The English Channel attracted many swimmers all over the world.
C. People all over the world sang high praise for Zhang’s deeds.
D. Zhang Jian won the first.
( ) 7. Zhang Jian put up special oil on his skin because __________________.
A. it could help him healthy
B. it could keep him warm while swimming in the water
C. he likes to do something new
D. he had to swim in the cold water for 12 hours
( ) 8. The word “altered” in Paragraph 4 has the same meaning as __________.
A. forgot B. lost C. loved D. changed
( ) 9. The Chinese felt _____ when they learned the news that Zhang Jian succeed in swimming across the English Channel.
A. interested B. surprised C. worried D. excited
( ) 10. Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?
A. Zhang Jian started his 12-hour journey from Dover, Britain on Sunday.
B. A pilot ship was arranged so as to provide necessary aid for Zhang Jian.
C. The British Swimmer was Zhang’s good friend.
D. Freestyle can help Zhang Jian save energy.
初二年级上学期（8A）
Unit 1---3
重 点 词 组
as slim as … 和…一样苗条 be ready to help people 乐于助人
travel around the world 周游世界 have poor eyesight 视力差
make him look smart 使他看起来神气 feel bored 感到无聊
a true friend 一个忠实的朋友 tell funny jokes 讲笑话
knock over 撞翻 think of my good friend 想起我的好朋友
say a bad word about sb. 说…的坏话 one of the nicest boys 最好的男孩之一
give me some advice 给我一些建议 bright, smiling eyes 明亮笑眯眯的眼睛
wear a smile on one’s face 面带微笑 a mixed school 一所男女混合的学校
how to cook and sew 如何煮饭缝纫 healthy and tasty meals 健康美味的饭
bring in books and magazines带来书和杂志 feel sick 感到晕车/ 不舒服
give seats to people in need 给有需要的人让座as well 也
have driving lessons 上驾驶课 during lunchtime 在午餐时间
spend a lot of time practicing 花许多时间练习 the same as 和……一样
What if it rains? 如果下雨怎么办 different from 不同的
my ideal school 我理想中的学校 wear school uniform 穿校服
need to exercise 需要锻炼 enjoy oneself 过得愉快
at the beginning 在开始的时候 get on a coach 上长途汽车
arrive at the world park 到达世界公园 be made of metal 由金属制成
get off quickly 很快下车 places of interest 名胜
all over the world 遍布全世界 an amazing day 令人惊讶的一天
the song and dance parade 歌舞游行 go and see for oneself 亲自去看看
take place 发生 cheer for our team 为我们队欢呼
50 yuan per person 每人五十元 as soon as possible 尽可能快
straight, shoulder-length hair 齐肩长的直发 have a good sense of humour 很有幽默感
half an hour of homework 半小时的回家作业
help me with my homework 在作业方面提供帮助
go on a school trip to museum 学校旅行去博物馆
have a great time talking to each other 互相交谈十分愉快
teach oneself how to make a home page 自学如何制作主页
have lots of time for after school activities 有许多时间进行课外活动
a big library with lots of useful books 一个有许多有用书籍的图书馆
invite me to join in their school trip 邀请我参加他们的学校旅行
be willing to share things with her friends 愿意与她的朋友分享东西
语 法 精 解
1. There is nothing else in the fridge. 冰箱里没有什么别的东西了。
else的意思是“别的”，“另外的”，用于修饰特殊疑问词或不定代词，并且常放在被修饰词的后面。如：What else shall we do to help the sick boy?
Is there any thing else you want to tell me?
I am too busy now. Someone else will help you to solve the problem.
2. What about the pizza in you bowl? 你碗里的比萨饼怎么样？
What about + sth./dong sth. (用于表示建议)。如：
What about sharing the cake with your cousin?
What about the dress with colourful patterns?
3. Do you believe what he/she says? 你相信他/她说的话吗？
what he/she says在这里是believe 的宾语从句。
宾语从句有三种情况：
(a) 陈述句：用that连接，如：We know (that) he lied to us.
(b) 一般疑问句：用if/whether连接，如； Please tell me if they won the game.
(c) 特殊疑问句：用特殊疑问词连接，如：Do you know when we shall have the meeting? Can you teach me how to make a poster?
4. We have been best friends for a long time. 我们是好朋友已经很久了。
Have/has done（过去分词）是现在完成时的基本形式，用法如下：
(a) 表示动作或状况发生在现在以前的某个未经指出的过去时间内，目前已经完成或结束，给现在留下了结果或造成了影响。
He has closed the window. (The window is closed.)
She has learned to cook. (Now she is able to cook.)
(b) 可用来表示动作或状况发生在以前的某个未经指出的过去时间内，但这个动作或状况直到如今尚未完成或结束，它还可能继续下去，也可能停止。
The old man has lived here since he was a child.
She has practiced playing piano for an hour.
5. She is willing to share things with her friends. 她愿意和她的朋友分享东西。
(1) share something with somebody的意思是“与…分享…”。如：
The two girls often share their secrets.
(2) be willing to do something. / be ready to do something意为“愿意做…/准备好做…”。
Are you willing to be the monitor of our class?
The girl isn’t willing to do any extra work. She is selfish.
I am ready to leave now.
6. She helps me with my homework and she always gives seats to people in need on the bus.她帮助我做家庭作业，而且她在公交车上总是给有需要的人让座。
help somebody with something的意思是“在…方面帮助某人”。如：
Tom often helps his deskmate with Maths.
in need是介词短语后置作定语。如：
They held a charity show to raise money for people in need.
1. He always makes me laugh. 它总是使我大笑。
make somebody do something的意思是“使某人干某事”。如：
His words made me realize that I made a mistake.
The round glasses make Max look smart.
2. I thought of my good friend May when I read your advertisement.
当看了你的广告后，我想起了我的好朋友梅。
think of 想起, 记起, 考虑；think about思考, 考虑；think over仔细考虑。如：
They think of a wonderful idea. We are thinking about when to go to Paris.
Think it over; you can solve this problem very soon.
3. 形容词
形容词(Adjective)是用来描写或修饰名词或代词，说明人或事物的归属性质、状态、大小或数量的词。
1）形容词在句中的作用：
A．做定语, 常放在名词前。如：They are comfortable trainers.
I heard the terrible noise last night.
B．表语, 常放在系动词之后。如：I was alone in the house. The news sounds exciting.
2)A．形容词的原级: 形容词的原级形式与形容词本身形式相同,用来描述人余人、事与事之间在某方面的相同或不同。 as+adj.+as的意思是“和……一样”；not as/so+adj.+as 是它的否定形式, 意思是“不如……”。
He is as clever as his father. 他和他的父亲一样聪明。
You are not as active as your sister. 你不如你的妹妹活跃。
B．形容词的比较级和最高级:
大多数形容词的比较级和最高级采用在词尾加-er和-est的形式，或在单词前加more和most构成的，形容词最高级前要加the。具体变化见下表:
单
音
节
单
词
单词形式
构成方式
原级
比较级
最高级
一般形式
词尾加-er和-est
clean
strong
cleaner
stronger
cleanest
strongest
以-e结尾的词
词尾加-r和-st
wide
brave
wider
braver
wildest
bravest
闭音节
双写最后一个辅音字母,加-er和-est
thin
slim
hot
thinner
slimmer
hotter
thinnest
slimmest
hottest
部
分
以辅音字母+y
结尾的词
变y为i, 再加
-er和-est
heavy
angry
heavier
angrier
heaviest
angriest
双
音
节
单
词
以-er结尾的词
在词尾加-er和-est
clever
cleverer
cleverest
以-ow结尾的词
在词尾加-er和-est
narrow
shallow
narrower
shallower
narrowest
shallowest
以-le结尾的词
在词尾加-r和-est
able
simple
abler
simpler
ablest
simplest
大部分双音节和多音节单词
在单词前加more和most
difficult
careful
more difficult
more careful
most difficult
most careful
3）形容词比较级的用法: 用于描述两种事物或人的比较
This storybook is cheaper than that fashion magazine.
He is much taller than his best friend.
形容词最高级的用法: 表示三者或三者以上人或事物的比较 the+最高级+比较范围 She is the most beautiful girl in the model team.
This is the best film that I have ever seen.
10. I like learning how to cook and sew. 我喜欢学习怎样做饭和怎样做缝纫。
有些动词之后可以接疑问词how, what, when, where, which, who再加动词不定式(why没有这种用法)。这类动词常用的有ask, decide, discover, find out, forget, know, learn, remember, see, show sb., think, understand, want to know, wonder。如:
The young man knows how to look after his grandfather.
I was shown how to solve the puzzle. We can’t decide where to have a picnic.
I wonder when to visit the house to the elderly.
11. Reading week is always too short because we want to read all our friends’ books as well. 阅读周总是太短。因为我们也想要读我们所有朋友的书。
as well 相当于too，是副词短语，一般放在句末。如：
Sandy is able to dance. She is able to sing as well. Simon is an actor and a director as well.
12. I meet my fiends and we always have a great time talking to each other.
我和朋友们相聚聊天，过得很愉快。
have a great time = enjoy oneself=have fun “过的愉快,玩得开心”
Last month we had a school trip and we had a great time hiking in the hills.
13. It means someone (who/whom)you admire very much.
意思是某个你很崇拜的人。
You admire very much 是定语从句。someone 是先行词，关系代词who/whom 在从句中作admire的宾语，所以可以被省略了。
14．两者之间的比较和两者以上的比较:
1) more 是many 和much 的比较级，可以与可数名词复数或不可数名词连用，如：more…than…
He knows more skills than other workers.
The adviser offered us more advice than he had done before.
2) most 是many 和much 的最高级: most…最多的
She has the most stamps in her class. We spend the most time on Maths.
3) few 的比较级是fewer 最高级是fewest，用于修饰可数名词
My friend has fewer football stickers than me. Tom has the fewest oranges of the three.
4) little 的比较级是less最高级是least, 用于修饰不可数名词
We try to spend less money than the other team. The bottle with the least water is Kitty’s.
15．like 和alike
1) like 表示 “像”,可以作介词,也可以作连词。它的位置往往在句子的中间,在名词或名词性从句之前。如：
This coat is like that one. You are like a teacher.
The man in the picture looks like Mr. Wang. You should do it like what you said.
2) alike 是形容词，一般只作表语，用于系动词之后
The two songs sound alike. My boots and Sandy’s are alike.
还可以作副词，如：Teachers must treat all the students alike.
Great minds think alike. 英雄所见略同。
16．The number of 和a number of
the number of …(…的数量)作主语时，谓语用单数；a number of… (大量…)修饰复数名词,谓语一般用复数。如：The number of the cranes is becoming less. 鹤的数量在减少。
A number of monkeys are jumping happily. 许多猴子高兴地跳着。
17．She has to stay in the hospital for a month. 她不得不住院一个月。
have to 和must 都表示必须，have to 往往是客观外界情况造成 “不得不”，must 表示说话人主观上认为 “应该” “有必要”。如：It is late now. We have to leave, or we’ll be late.
I must finish my task this afternoon.
18. Kitty’s teacher Mr. Wu invited me to join in their school trip.
Kitty的老师吴老师邀请我参加他们的学校旅行。
1) invite somebody. to do something. 的意思是“邀请某人做某事”；invite somebody. to something的意思是“邀请某人…”。
The artist invited us to visit the gallery. He was invited to dinner by the headmaster.
2)join作及物动词，是 “参加”一群人的活动，或 “加入”某个组织成为其中一员。
join in something. / join somebody. in something.的意思是“参加某一活动”。如:
Harry joined his friends last weekend./ He joined the League in 2004.
He’ll join us in the painting.
19. The trip from Kitty’s school took about two hours by coach.
从Kitty的学校出发的行程乘长途车花了大约2小时。
1) take 表示 “花费, 消耗”,此时主语一般是物。常用于 “It +takes/took/will take somebody to do something.”中。如：The long journey took us half a year.
It took us half a year to take the long journey.
2) 乘坐交通工具用by+交通工具。如:
by coach / car / bus / tram / boat / ship (sea) / train / plane (air)
20. It is made of metal and really tall. 它由金属制成，而且真的很高。
1) be made of 由…制成, 所制成的产品能看出原材料。
The shoes are made of leather.
The tie is made of silk.
2) be made from由…制成, 所制成的产品看不出原材料。
The beer is made of wheat.
The paper with good quality is made of bamboo.
21. There are over a hundred places of interest from all over the world.
有来自全世界的超过一百个名胜。
1）places of interest 的意思为“名胜”。如：Tiger Hill is one of the places of interest in Suzhou.
2）over= more than的意思是“超过”。如：There are more than fifty students in our class.
22. Daniel taught himself how to make a home page. 丹尼尔自学如何做主页。
1) teach oneself to do something. /how to do something.的意思是“自学(如何)作某事”，而teach oneself somehting的意思是“自学…”。如：
She can sing well, but she taught herself.
Though his father is old, he is teaching himself how to use computers.
2）how to make a home page 是疑问词+不定式, 在句中作宾语。如：
Can you tell me how to get to the post office? She knows where to buy this CD.
They have to decide when to start charity walk.
23. 并列连词: and, but, or的用法
1) and 用来连接语法作用相同的词，表示 “和”。如：
He can speak Chinese and French. (表并列, 连接两个名词)
They shook hands and began to talk at once. (表顺序, 连接两个短语)
His mother cleans the house and he plays the piano. (连接两个句子)
2）but 表示转折,意思 “但是, 然而, 却”,可用来连接有对立或对照性的词短语和句子。如：He is energetic but strange.
They have three envelopes but on stamps.
He works hard every day, but it seems to have no improvement.
3）or 意思是 “或者, 还是” 表示二者选择其一。如：Is it green or blue?
Simon or Daniel can work it out. You can stay at home or go out for a trip.
注意：or连接两个主语时,谓语动词的单复数由or后面的主语决定，即 “就近原则”。
Either you or she went to the park yesterday. You or I am right.
24. 反身代词
反身代词:是表示 “自己; 本身; 亲自”的意思的词。反身代词表示动作发出者将动作反射到自己身上，即句子的主语和宾语指的是同一对象。
其基本形式：第一人称: myself, ourselves
第二人称: yourself, yourselves
第三人称: himself, herself, itself; themselves
如：My aunt is teaching herself a new language.
The little girl is old enough to take care of herself.
We enjoyed ourselves in the cinema.
If you are not careful, it’s easy to hurt yourself. ( 作宾语, 表示自己)
I can finish it myself. (亲自, 本人)
My mother worried not about herself, but me. (作介词的补充成分)
典 型 例 题
1. I have to pay __________ usual for the coat because the discount is over.
A. as much twice B. much twice C. twice as much as D. times two
解析：答案选C。
句子意思是：由于降价结束了我不得不付了比平时多的钱买这件大衣。选项中没有比较级，但是能找到原级比较的结构 “as+形容词原级+as”的形式，这里“twice as much as”表示“和两倍一样多”。例如：The water in this bottle is as much as that in the glass.三倍那样多“three times as much as”其他选项不能表达正确的意思，故选C。
2. Sue works faster than _______ girls in the office.
A. any other B. any C. another D. others
解析：答案选A。
首先可以排除any，如果用any girls表示任何女孩，其中包括Sue在内，但是我们不能和自己本身相比较，所以不能选A。Another 表示“又一，再一”，一般用于修饰单数名词，如：another girl。如：could you please show me another pair of jeans. Other 通常与any， some 等连用，表示“另外一些”。如：Do you have any other books on this subject？others是代词，用于代替other+名词，例如：Some students are reading while other students are playing chess.= Some students are reading while others are playing chess. 故选A。
3. Don’t ______ to others like that. You should ________ politely.
A. say; speak B. say; talk C. talk; speak D. speak; tell
解析：答案选C。
say, speak, talk, tell都可以理解为“说”，但它们的用法有些不同之处。Say一般是一个及物动词，后面跟的是说话的内容。例如：He said that he was good at sport. He said, “I was good at sport.” speak侧重于演讲，讲某一种语言，或讲话的方式，如：He is able to speak in public for hours. He can speak French. The lady spoke softly to the child. tell意思是告诉，也用于讲故事等，如，The teacher told me the interesting news. He is kind enough to tell the children stories. Talk经常跟说话的对象talk to/with somebody。所以第一个空应选talk, 第二个空选speak。故选C。
4. She isn’t quite tall, so I don’t think she can sit _______ the classroom.
A. in front of B. at the back of C. at the front of D. behind
解析：答案选C。
in front of意思是“在……的前面（外面）”，如：There is a tree in front of the house. Behind意思与in front of相对。如：There is a yard behind my house.。At the back of 和at the front of 都表示在室内，根据句子意思她很高判断，她不能坐在教室的前面。故选C。
5. We hope the foreign student can _______ our trip to the World Park.
A. take part B. join in C. take place D. joins
解析：答案选B。
表示参加的短语有 “take part in”和 “join in”, 用于表示参加某种活动。Join表示加入某一组织或成为某一组织的成员。Take place是 “发生”。句意是参加我们的旅行，而且情态动词后用动词原形，所以不能选D。A选项少了一个介词in。故选B。
6. I couldn’t _______ any interesting book on the bookshelf.
A. look at B. discover C. find D. find out
解析：答案选C。
look at 意思是 “看”,不合题意，可以先排除。Discover发现以前早就存在而未被被人们所知的事物。Find out 通过调查，或努力查明事实。在这里只有find表示的是look for的结果可以用于表示发现一本有趣的书，所以选C。
7. The meeting hall isn’t _________ to hold so many people.
A. bigger enough B. enough big C. very big enough D. big enough
解析：答案选B。
根据句意会议大厅不够大，无法容纳那么多人。这一个结构中要使用形容词原级，所以A不正确。Enough修饰形容词要后置adj + enough，所以只能选C, D之一。并且如果使用了enough就不再使用very, quite, rather等表示程度的词了。故选B。
8. Everyone must learn to look after ________.
A. himself B. themselves C. yourself D. herself
解析：答案选B。
本题主要考察复合不定代词的用法。Everyone, everybody, nobody等作主语时, 后面的代词常用第三人称复数形式。所以使用themselves。又如: Nobody would like themselves to be laughed at. 和Everyone believes themselves。故选B。
9. Doing more exercise and eating ______ food can help you stay ______.
A. healthy; healthy B. healthily; health C. health; healthy D.health; health
解析：答案选D。
health是名词 “健康”, healthy是形容词 “健康的”，healthily是副词 “健康地”，第一个空后的food是名词，我们用形容词修饰名词：healthy food。第二个空的前面是连系动词stay后面应该使用形容词充当它的表语，是stay healthy。故选D。
10. I ______ much time _____ my homework yesterday.
A. took; to do B. cost; doing C. spent; to do D. spent; doing
解析：答案选D。
take, cost, spend三个词都可表示 “花费”。take一般只用于表示花费时间，而且使用形式主语句型“It takes / took somebody some time to do something.”。例如: It took me half an hour to draw the picture。Cost 常用于表示花费金钱，此时要用物作主语，如: The trainers cost me three hundred yuan。Spend 既可表示花时间又可表示花钱。通常是 “spend some time/some money on something.或spend some time/some money (in) doing something.”。故选D。
综 合 练 习 （A）
听 力 部 分
I. 根据所听问题，选择正确答案：(5%)
( ) 1. A. Yes, I like. B. Yes, I do. C. Very much D. No, I don’t.
( ) 2. A. Yes, please. B. No, I don’t. C. That’s right. D. Good idea.
( ) 3. A. Certainly. B. With pleasure. C. Never mind. D. Why not.
( ) 4. A. Yes, they are. B. No, they are. C. No, they don’t. D. Yes, they do.
( ) 5. A. 2 kilimetres. B. 30 minutes. C. 2 years. D. 15 kilos.
II. 根据所听短文判断下列句子的正(T)误(F)：(5%)
( ) 1. A doctor lived in a small town many years ago.
( ) 2. Everyone in the town disliked him.
( ) 3. His bad memory made him do something foolish at times.
( ) 4. People stopped going to him because they were afraid.
( ) 5. The doctor had cured all the sick people in the town.
笔 试 部 分
III. 单项选择: (16%)
( ) 1. I don’t like _________ my sadness __________ anyone else.
A. share; with B. sharing; with C. share; and D. sharing; and
( ) 2. __________, or you won’t be able to hear anything.
A. Listen; careful B. Listen; carefully C. Listens; careful D. Listens; arefully
( ) 3. Look! The young lady _________ a smile on her face and looks happy.
A. wearing B. with C. wears D. is wearing
( ) 4. I believe _______ he can teach himself how to make a model plane.
A. what B. that C. which D. why
( ) 5. Thank you for _________ me with my homework.
A. help B. to help C. helping D. helps
( ) 6. The Chinese people are good at ___________.
A. playing table tennis B. play table tennis
C. to play table tennis D. plays table tennis
( ) 7. It seems _________. Please stay inside if possible.
A. snowing B. snowy C. snow D. snowed
( ) 8. Please e-mail me _________ you arrive in Washing ton DC.
A. as possible as B. as soon as C. until D. both A and B
( ) 9. I have a friend ________Nancy. She is my _______ friend of all.
A. is called; best B. is called; the best C. called; the best D. called; best
( ) 10. --- How do you like your sister?
--- She is generous and is _______ to help people in need.
A. will B. helpful C. ready D. careful
( ) 11.--- Lily broke her leg when she was skiing.
--- Oh, really? __________.
A. I am sorry to hear that. B. Never mind.
C. It doesn’t matter. D. That’s all right.
( ) 12. --- There is no bread in the fridge, _______? --- Yes, there is.
A. isn’t there B. is there C. wasn’t there D. was there
( ) 13. There is a garden _____________ of the house.
A. in front of B. in the front of C. before D. below
( ) 14. The students are passing the ball from one to ________.
A. the other B. another C. others D. other
( ) 15. I wonder ___________.
A. where has she go B. where has she gone
C. where she has went D. where she has gone
( ) 16. I hope Andy _________ to join us in the charity work.
A. to come B. can come C. is coming D. come
IV. 用所给词的正确形式填空 (8%)
1． At the __________ (begin) of the plane trip, I was a little nervous.
2. Mum is _________ (prepare) lunch while Dad is reading a magazine.
3. This evening there will be a basketball ________(finally).
4. It will take us ________(many) than two hours to get there.
5. Yesterday I _________(receive) a letter from my uncle.
6. The trip to the hill was really _________ (bore).
7. Beijing is one of the ________(good) cities in the world.
8. My mother can cook very healthy and _______(taste) meals.
V. 根据文章意思填空 (6%)
Is it _________(可能的) to send a letter to someone anywhere in the world without putting a stamp on it? It is easy to do so. Using __________(电脑) you can send e-mail quickly and easily. If you have an e-mail address, you can write, send and receive messages.
E-mail is the most inexpensive way to communicate(沟通) with your friends. You can send __________(信息) at any time of day or night to people all over the world without paying for a long-distance call. You can send the same message to fifty people or more. It doesn't __________(要紧的) if your friends are in bed when you send e-mail to them, or you are seeing a ________(电影) at the cinema when they send e-mail back. Many schools give e-mail addresses to their __________(学生). E-mail addresses are becoming popular.
VI. 完成句子（15%）
1. Millie是四个女孩中最可爱的。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 新衬衫让他看起来确实很神气。
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 西蒙多久去一次排球队。
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 当我看到金门大桥时，我不能相信自己的眼睛。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 我们应该为我们的队喝彩。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完形填空：(10%)
Learning how to play the piano is not the only way for children to have a bright future. Storytelling can also take them on the road to 1 excellent students. The __2 in Shanghai have paid much attention to story telling. They 3_ many storytelling contests every year. And the children have 4_ great interest and taken an active part in this. Some students who were too shy to speak in public have been now very good _5_ .
One leader from Shanghai said: “ Now many parents 6 their children to learn how to play the piano or violin. 7 the money and energy they spend can’t ensure that their children will 8 much in a short period of time. However, training children to tell stories is quite 9 . Although it costs little, it’s a good and easy way for children to 10 .
( ) 1. A. like B. learn C. become D. help
( ) 2. A. schools B. libraries C. children D. lessons
( ) 3. A. read B. have C. listen D. look
( ) 4. A. shown B. stopped C. happened D. refused
( ) 5. A. teachers B. listeners C. students D. speakers
( ) 6. A. keep B. send C. help D. let
( ) 7. A. But B. So C. And D. Even
( ) 8. A. play B. rest C. learn D. use
( ) 9. A. new B. different C. difficult D. expensive
( ) 10. A. think B. develop C. know D. sing
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
（A）
In American high school, most students take English, science, Math, and history. These are basic courses and each course is as useful as the others. I English class, the students study grammar and read famous literature(文学). In science class, thy study biology(生物), chemistry or physics. History is more interesting to some students because they “learn about important events and places in the United States. Students take other courses, too. These are electives(选修). Some study music because they feel it more enjoyable. Some study computer because they think it is more practical. In each class, teachers give students exams. Some exams are very difficult than others but a good student can always do well.
根据短文内容判断正（T）误（F）
( ) 1. Most students in America take five basic courses.
( ) 2. History is the most interesting course among them.
( ) 3. The students can choose some courses according to their interest.
(B)
Many people who work in London prefer to live outside it, and to go to their offices, factory or school every day by train, car or bus, even though this means they have to get up earlier and reach home later in the evening.
One advantage(好处) of living outside London is that the houses are cheaper. Even a small flat in London without a garden costs quite a lot to rent(租). With the same money, one can get a
little house in the country with a garden of one’s own. Then, in the country one can rest away from the noise and hurry of the town. Even though one has to get up earlier and spend more time in trains or buses, one can sleep better at night and during weekends and on summer evenings, one can enjoy the fresh, clean air of the country. If one likes gardens, one can spend one’s free time digging, planting, watering and other jobs which are needed in a garden. Then when the flowers and vegetables come up, one has the reward of one who has shared the secret of Nature.
Some people, however, take no interest in country things. For them happiness lies in the town, with its cinemas and theatres, beautiful shops and busy streets, dance-halls and restaurants. Such people would feel that their life was not worth living if they had to live outside London. An occasional(偶尔) walk in one of the parks and a fortnight’s() visit to the sea every summer is all the country they want: the rest they are quite prepared to leave to those who are glad to get away from London every night.
( ) 4. What kind of people like to live outside the city?
A. People who work in London.
B. People who like cinemas, theatres and beautiful shops.
C. People who have a lot of money.
D. People who love the city life.
( ) 5. One can ______ in London with the same money for buying a little house with a garden in the country.
A. rent a small flat with a garden B. rent a small flat without a garden
C. get a small flat with a garden D. get a small flat without a garden
( ) 6. When the flowers and vegetables come up, one has the reward of one ____ has shared the secret of Nature.
A. who works in they city B. who lives in the country
C. who has spend time working in the garden D. who is a farmer.
(C)
Many years ago there were airships in the sky. Airships were large balloons. They were full of gas to keep them in the air, but the gas was dangerous and burned quickly.
One of the largest airships was called the Hindenburg. This was a German airship. It was 245 metres long and it carried more than 100 people. It could move through the sky at 120 kilometres an hour. Its journey across the Atlantic took a week. The Hindenburg had 16 bags of gas inside it. When the airship was on the ground these bags were empty. When the pilot of the airship wanted to leave the ground, he filled the bags with gas.
For four months in 1935 the Hindenburg flew every week between Germany and America. Most of the passengers were rich people. They liked the Hindenburg because although the journey cost a lot of money, it was very comfortable. On 6 May, 1935 when the Hindenburg was landing in America, it caught fire and crashed. The people on the ground could do nothing to help the passengers in the airship. 34 people died. 97 people jumped to the ground and lived.
For many years after the Hindenburg crash everyone stopped using airships. They thought they were too dangerous. Nowadays, however, there are new gases that do not burn quickly. Some people think that there will soon be many airships in the sky again because they are much cleaner and quieter than planes.
( ) 7. The Hindenburg _________.
A. was full of balloons B. did not carry any gas
C. was a German airship D. was 100 metres long
( ) 8. The journey from Germany to America on the Hindenburg ________.
A. took seven days B. was not very expensive
C. took longer than on other airships D. was not very comfortable
( ) 9. When the airship left the ground _________.
A. the gas bags were full B. the gas bags were empty
C. it did not come down for 4 months D. it had no passengers
( ) 10. The hindengurg crashed because________.
A. there was too many people on it
B. the pilot made a mistake
C. the bags were filled with dangerous gas
D. the airship was flying too near the ground
IX. 书面表达 (15%)
要求：1. 文中不得出现真实姓名和学校名称。2．字数在80个左右。
内容：1. 我有一个好朋友名叫玛丽，她头发短短的，十分可爱。
2. 她十分大方并且乐于助人，经常在公共汽车上给老人让座。
3. 她还十分有幽默感，和她在一起我总是觉得很高兴。
4. 她是一个真正的朋友，因为她能替我保密，并且从不说别人的坏话。
综 合 练 习 （B）
听 力 部 分
I. 根据所听问题，选择正确答案：(5%)
( )1. A. On Friday B. On Thursday C. On Wednesday D. On Saturday
( )2. A. Something is wrong with his hand. B. Something is wrong with his head.
C. Something is wrong with his eyes. D. Something is wrong with his legs.
( )3. A. At the park gate at 9:00. B. At the school gate at 9:00.
C. At the school gate at 8:30. D. At the park gate at 8:30.
( )4. A. In China. B. In England. C. In America. D. In New Zealand.
( )5. A. Fly kites. B. Read the newspaper. C. Make kites. D. Go shopping.
II. 根据所听短文判断下列句子的正(T)误(F)：(5%)
( )1.David Beckham was born in 1975.
( )2. David’s uncle used to help him practise his football skills.
( )3. When he was 11, David won an award for football.
( )4. David’s wife wrote a book about football.
( )5. The Queen of England gave David a special award.
笔 试 部 分
III. 单项选择: (16%)
( ) 1. Today there is lots of homework to do, I can’t play football, so I ___________.
A. feel happy B. feel unhappily C. feel happily D. feel unhappy
( ) 2. I like skiing better than swimming because I think swimming is _______ skiing.
A. not as exciting as B. not as more exciting as
C. not as most exciting as D. more exciting than
( ) 3. My best friend isn’t good at geography. I want to ________ help them.
A. try my best B. try my best to C. try me best to D. tried my best to
( ) 4. My father will stay in London ________ six weeks.
A. for B. about C. after D. in
( ) 5. The Summer Palace is one of ______________ in Beijing.
A. the most beautiful park B. the beautiful park
C. the most beautiful parks D. the more beautiful park
( ) 6. --Excuse me. __________ is the nearest post office?
--It is about twenty minutes’ walk from here.
A. How much B. How often C. How far D. how long
( ) 7. Which book will you choose ____________.
A. reading B. read C. reads D. to read
( ) 8. The trip _______ about five hours by train.
A. spent B. took C. used D. cost
( ) 9. I usually _______ home at 5:30 after school.
A. get to B. reach C. arrive at D. arrive
( )10. Stephen felt _______ today, so his father took him to the hospital.
A. sick B. happy C. hungry D. sweet
( )11. Kitty put her photos on the table for everyone _________.
A. to look B. to look at C. to see D. to watch
( )12. --- Where shall we go this weekend? --- _______ going to see the Pyramids in Egypt?
A. Let us B. Shall we C. What about D. Why not
( )13. ---How did Daniel learn how to make a home page? --- Oh, he ___________.
A. learned himself B. taught himself
C. learned by himself D. taught by himself
( )14. Ocean Park is great fun, ______ the tickets are expensive.
A. so B. and C. but D. or
( )15. Yesterday I read a _________ story, and I was really very _________.
A. frighten; frightened B. frightened; frightening
C. frightening; frightened D. frightening; frighten
( )16. Every year natural disasters(自然灾害) kill ________ people.
A. three thousands B. thousands of C. thousand of D. three thousand of
IV. 用所给词的正确形式填空 (8%)
1. I have a true friend and he can always keep ________ (secret).
2. It is a good quality to try your _______ (good) to help others.
3. Are you _________(will) to sing an English song for us?
4. Every day I spend lots of time practicing _________(speak) French.
5. In my _______(idea) school, we only have an hour of homework every day.
6. ________(luck), he failed to pass the important exam.
7. There are many places of great _________(interest) in Beijing.
8. We are _________(prepare) for the coming sports meeting.
V. 根据中文意思填出所缺单词 (6%)
Water is the “life blood” of our _________(地球). It is in every living thing. It is in the air. It runs through _____________(山) and valleys. It forms lakes and seas. Nature has a great water system. Rainwater finds its way to rivers and lakes. River water runs into the sea. At the mouths of the rivers, fresh water joins the _______(咸的) water of the sea.
Here at the mouth of a river there is much ___________(重要的) plant and animal life. But ___________(污染)destroys this life. We have to clean our rivers. Man has to work with nature, not __________(违背) it.
VI. 完成句子 (15%)
1. 飞机起飞时的噪音实在是糟透了。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 我妹妹对打网球感兴趣,但她不擅长网球。
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 上周他们的父亲同意和他们一起去骑马,并且他们过得很愉快。
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 我决定明年为我自己买一个MP3播放器。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 对他来说在5分钟内画一幅画很容易。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完形填空：(10%)
On school days, American students usually 1 up at 7 a.m. Most students walk or 2 a yellow school bus. Very few students ride 3 . When they arrive 4 school at about 8:30 a.m., they meet their friends and talk about their activities. They put their backpack(背包) in a small cupboard and take 5 one book for that subject, some writing 6 and pencils to each class. In middle school, their 7 are English, Maths, Science, Geography, Biology, PE, Music, Art. At 8 , the students eat lunch at school. They usually have meat, vegetables, fruit, bread and a drink. However, some students prefer pizza, hot dogs or hamburgers. After 9 , they go to classes until 3 p.m. and then they go back 10 .
( ) 1. A. get B. gets C. getting D. get
( ) 2. A. by B. in C. take D. taking
( ) 3. A. cars B. horses C. taxis D. bicycles
( ) 4. A. in B. at C. to D. for
( ) 5. A. just B. about C. like D. and
( ) 6. A. papers B. paper C. pen D. pens
( ) 7. A. classes B. subjects C. languages D. lessons
( ) 8. A. morning B. time C. noon D. afternoon
( )9. A. class B. school C. breakfast D. lunch
( )10. A. home B. to home C. their home D. to school
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Do you want to save money when you travel by train? Here are some ways.
* Day Return(往返票)
This kind of ticket can save you 45% on the fare (money for ticket). You have to travel before 8.00 a.m. and after 6.00 p.m. from Monday to Friday, but you can travel at any time on Saturday or Sunday.
* Big City Savers(优惠票)
You can save much money with these tickets on some trains. You have to buy them by 16.00 the day before you travel.
* Weekend Returns
You can use Weekend Returns for most journeys over 60 miles. Go on Friday, Saturday or Sunday, and return the same weekend on Saturday or Sunday, and you can save 35% on the fare.
* Monthly Returns
You can use these tickets for most journeys over 65 miles. Go any day and return within a month. Monthly Returns can save you 25% on the fare.
* Family Returns
You can get a card of Family Returns for £20 and then when you buy tickets later, you need to pay only £3 for each of the other family members (4 at most). You can travel as often as you like within two months.
( ) 1. If a man buys himself a ticket of £15 and three tickets for his family with a
card of Family Returns, how much will he pay?
A. £47 B. £27 C. £24 D. £15
( ) 2. Which of the following is true?
A. A card of Family Returns can only be used(被使用) for three months.
B. If you want to travel to London by air, you can use Big City Savers.
C. If you leave this Friday and return next Saturday, you can use Weekend Returns.
D. You can use Day Returns at any time on weekends.
( )3. The passage is probably taken from a __________.
A. comic book B. newspaper C. textbook D. storybook
(B)
It can be dangerous to travel by sea. Ships sometimes sink far away from land. When this happens, the sailors have to get into small boats. If another ship does not come and help them and they do not have enough food or water, they may die.
Most people believe we must not drink sea water. They believe that if we do, we shall be very ill because of all the salt in the water. A doctor called Alain Bombard did not believe this. He thought that people could stay alive by drinking sea water and eating small fish, animals, and plants from the sea. On 19 October 1953, he set out in a small boat to cross the Atlantic Ocean. He did not take any food or water with him.
Every day Dr. Bombard drank just a little sea water. He also caught fish and they had water in them. He took small plants from the sea, which gave him more food.
Dr. Bombard became hot, tired and quite ill, but after 65 days at sea he was still alive. He traveled 2750 miles from one side of the Atlantic Ocean to the other, and on 24 December 1953 he reached Barbados.
He lost 20 kilos, but he showed that people could live on sea water and animals and plant in the sea.
( ) 4. What is this story mainly about?
A. Drinking sea water. B. A dying sailor.
C. A clever doctor. D. A happy journey.
( ) 5. Alain Bombard was _________.
A. an old sailor B. a fisherman C. a teacher D. a doctor
( ) 6. He went across __________ in 1953.
A. many countries B. a large ocean C. a ship D. a small town
( ) 7. He wanted to show that ___________.
A. sea water was dangerous
B. fish and plants were good for people
C. people could drink sea water and not die
D. sailors often died when they were traveling on the sea
(C)
Marco Polo was a famous explorer (探险家). With his father and uncle, he left the city of Venice(威尼斯) in 1271 and went to China. Marco was 17 years old when he started his journey (行程). When he went back, he was 41 years old!
The Polos’ journey was very difficult and after a journey of more than three and a half years they got to China. Marco worked there for seventeen years. At last it was time to go home.
This time the three Polos went by ship. This journey was longer than the first. Fourteen ships and six hundred men left China but only eighteen reached Persia. In the winter of 1295, they reached Venice at last.
阅读短文后填空: (6分)
8. Marco Polo left Venice in ________.
9. When he went back to Italy, he was _______.
10. It took the Polos ______________ years to get to China.
IX. 书面表达 (15%)
题目：My ideal school
要求：1. 文中不得出现真实姓名和学校名称。
2. 字数在80个左右。
内容：1. 我在一所混合式学校上学，每天9点上学，下午学校3：00放学。
2. 我最爱的课程是家政课，在进校前我自己不会做什么事，现在我学会做健康美味的饭菜了。
3. 学校每年有读书周，我们可以阅读自己喜欢的书籍。我们很喜欢。
4. 每天放学我们都花许多时间打棒球，有时候也和同学去逛街。
Unit 4---6
重 点 词 组
10 days old 十天大 look like a little mouse 看起来像小老鼠
weigh 100 grams 重100克 start to go outside 开始外出
for the first time 第一次 up to 14 hours a day 一天长达十四小时
kill it for its fur 为了皮毛而屠杀它 cut down forests 砍伐森林
have nowhere to live 没有居住的地方 on one’s own 独自的，独立的
be in danger 处于危险中 stay alive 活着
hunt for food 捕食 a terrible snowstorm 可怕的暴风雪
live as a family 以家庭形式居住 live in family groups 群居
lose one’s lives 失去生命 continue to build road 继续建路
at a time 一次 keep taking the land 不断地占据土地
go birdwatching 观鸟 white and grey feathers 灰白相间的羽毛
northern countries 北方国家 broad wings 宽的翅膀
all year round 终年 for a short stay 短期停留
an important living area 重要的居住区域 less and less space 越来越少的空间
the Chinese Government中国政府 do a bird count 数鸟
frighten the birds 吓唬鸟类 prevent flood 预防洪水
watch the birds closely 仔细地观察鸟类 drop litter carelessly 随意扔垃圾
talk softly 轻声地交谈 sing nicely 动听地歌唱
lose the game 输了比赛 several accidents 几起事故
kill thousands of people杀死数以千计的人 crash into a tree 撞到一棵树
wash the village away 冲走村庄 fall from a tree 从树上摔下来
look at each other in fear惊恐地互相看着 attack people 袭击人
run in all directions 四处奔去 run wildly 疯狂地逃窜
fall down 掉下来 come down 倒下来
calm down 冷静下来 be trapped 被困住
say to myself 心里想 a moment of fear 片刻的恐惧
shout for help 呼救 a packet of chocolate 一袋巧克力
hear excited shouts 听见激动的喊叫声 see the bright daylight 看见明亮的日光
move away the bricks 搬开砖块 walk through a rainforest 穿过热带雨林
make excuses 找借口 bombs below the ground 像地下的炸弹
an earthquake in Taiwan台湾的一次地震 mop it up/ mop up the floor 拖地
be in a great hurry to do something. 十分匆忙地做…
write to newspapers and magazines 写信给报纸杂志
a nature reserve in north-east China 在中国东北的自然保护区
one of the world’s most important wetlands 世界上最重要的湿地之一
provide food and shelter for them 为他们提供食物和栖息地
make more space for farms and buildings 为农场和建筑物腾出空间
protect these endangered birds 保护这些濒危鸟类
study the different kinds of birds 研究不同种类的鸟
the changes in their numbers 他们数量方面的变化
understand the importance of wetlands 明白湿地的重要性
tell us not to make any noise 叫我们不要发出噪音
feel a slight shaking through my body 感觉一阵轻微的震动通过全身
hear a big noise like thunder 听到象雷声的巨大噪音
The temperature will drop a little. 温度会稍有下降.
The temperature will drop to -5℃ 温度会降到零下五度
take actions to protect giant pandas 采取行动保护大熊猫
make giant panda reserves bigger 扩大大熊猫保护区
good eyesight, hearing and smell 好的视力，听力和嗅觉
grow into a healthy young giant panda 长成一头健康的年轻的大熊猫
encourage farmers to leave the giant panda reserves 鼓励农民离开保护区
语 法 精 讲
1. I first saw the baby panda when she was only 10 days old.
我第一次看到她时，她只有十天大。
1) 10 days old的意思是“十天大”。数词+ days/months/years + old的意思为“几天/几个月/几岁大”。如：The baby is nine months old, and she is able to talk.
He graduated from the university when he was twenty five years old.
2) a 10-day old giant panda 数词-day/month/year-old+ 被修饰的名词
Cathy is a fourteen-year old girl who loves painting.
The eighty-year-old man is a great scientist.
2. At four months, she weighed about 10 kilograms and started to go outside her home for the first time.四个月大时，她重十公斤，并且第一次开始出门。
1) weigh v. 称重 weight n. 重量
The cat weighs about 2 kilos.= The weight of the cat is about 2 kilos.
2) start to do something., start dong something, begin to do something., begin doing something的意思均为“开始做…”。如：
She started/began to learn how to drive at the age of thirty.
She started/began learning how to drive at the age of thirty.
3) for the first time 第一次 for the second/third/ fourth/fifth…time
3. At the very beginning, Xi Wang drank her mother’s milk for up to 14 hours a day. 一开始，希望每天喝母乳长达14个小时。
1)at the very beginning在一开始的时候，at the beginning of …在…开始的时候， 如：We don’t know each other at the beginning of the first term.
2) in the middle of 在…的中间的时候 In the middle of last month we had a picnic.
3) at the end of 在…结束的时候 They got married at the end of last year and moved out of the flat.
4) up to 意为“直到” She used to work up to twelve hours a day.
4. Sadly, it is difficult for giant pandas to survive in the wild.
可惜的是, 大熊猫很难在野外存活下来。
1) It is +形容词+ for somebody+ to do something。it 代替不定式作句子的主语。如：
It is necessary for use to learn something about the world around us.
It is impossible for you to get success without working hard.
能够接for somebody. 的形容词是对不定式中的动作进行评价的, 如: hard, difficult, easy, important , unimportant, interesting, boring, necessary, possible, impossible等。
2) It is +形容词 + of somebody +to do something 如：
It is generous of him to pay for the meal for us.
It was careless of the girl to leave her bag on the bus.
能够接of somebody 的形容词是用于描述人的性格特征的, 如: good, nice kind, clever, smart, bright, wise, silly, foolish, stupid, selfish, generous, careful, careless, thoughtful, right, wrong, honest, dishonest, typical等。
5. Mothers often leave baby pandas for two whole days on their own.
大熊猫经常把自己的孩子单独留下两整天。
on one’s own = by oneself = alone，其意思为“独立的；独自的”。如：
The old man is very lonely because he lives on his own.
You should work out the problem by yourself.
Man cannot live alone on an island.
6. If people find baby pandas alone, they will often take them away.
如果人们发现熊猫崽单独待着,他们通常会把它们带走。
1)“ find somebody / something + 形容词”的结构中形容词作宾语补足语。如：
He found the sentence wrong. I found it interesting to read the comics.
2) take them away 把他们带走。代词it/them必须放在两词之间，类似的短语有：take it/them off(脱)，put it/them on(穿), think it/ them over(考虑)，look it/ them up(查字典)等等。
7. If the giant pandas are in danger, what can we do?
如果大熊猫处于危险中，我们能做些什么？
1)in danger的意思为“在危险中”；be dangerous的意思为“对别人或物造成危险”。如：
The number of tigers is getting smaller do they are in danger.
Tigers are dangerous because when they are hungry the attack people.
2) 类似用法的短语有: in trouble, in need。如：
Their house caught a fire and they were in trouble. / We should help those who are in need.
8. encourage farmer to leave the giant panda reserves 鼓励农民离开熊猫保护区
encourage somebody to do something的意思为“鼓励某人做某事”。如：
My parents encourage me to be an inventor.
My best friend encourages me to take up the hard job.
9. I will see some beautiful birds if I walk through a rain forest.
如果我走过雨林的话，我会看见一些美丽的鸟儿。
through 意为“穿过,通过”，着重从空间穿过；across也为“穿过”，但指从平面的一端到另一端或十字交叉。如：The train is running through the tunnel.
When you see the bank, walk across the road. The post office is right there.
10. If I don’t buy them someone else will buy them.
如果我不买，其他人也会买的。
else 可以作形容词或副词, 作形容词时主要用于who, whose, what等疑问代词或somebody, anyone, nothing等不定代词之后作定语；作副词时，用于when, where等后坐状语。如：Who else would like to climb the hill?
Eddie ate all the food in the fridge and there was nothing left.
We cannot decide where else to visit today.
11. Mother giant pandas have only one or two babies at a time.
母熊猫一次生产一到两只熊猫崽。
at a time的意思是“一次”。而at times相当于from time to time，意思为“时常，不时”；at all times的意思是“总是”。如：He gets angry with his son at times.
He is willing to help his friends at all times.
He is a good speaker, and is able to make a speech for two hours at a time.
12. Their number is getting smaller and smaller because their living areas are becoming farmlands
他们的数量变得越来越少，因为他们的生存空间正渐渐变成农田。
比较级连用表示 “越来越……” 如：The famous athlete is running faster and faster.
He exercises a lot, so his health is getting better and better.
13. If farmers keep taking the land, giant pandas will have nowhere to live.
如果农民不停的侵占土地，大熊猫就没有地方居住了。
keep doing something的意思是“不停地做某事，一直作某事”。如：
They kept watching TV for three hours. / I kept thinking about my teachers words last night.
14. 条件状语从句
引导条件状语从句的连词有：if如果, unless除非, as long as只要, in case如果, if only但愿等等。如：Unless the weather was bad, my father used to have a walk in the morning.
As long as you are free, we will go shopping right now.
If only he had come, he would have met you.
You’d better take a raincoat in case it rains.
1）条件句表示将来可能发生的情况:
If 引导的条件句可以表示将来“可能”发生的情况,即逐句事态的发生有赖于从句事态的发生。一般条件状语从句动词用一般现在时，主句动词用will/shall+
不定式的一般将来时形式。如：
If we catch the 10 o’clock train, we shall get there by lunchtime.
If he goes to France, he will have to learn French.
If it is a fine day tomorrow, I won’t stay at home.
What are you going to do if it’s a holiday?
2）条件句表示重复性的, 可预见的情况。
If 条件句也可以表示重复性的, 可预见的情况或习惯动作, 此时条件状语从句的动词用一般现在时, 逐句动词也用一般现在时。
3）表示普遍真理合客观事实。如：
If the temperature drops to 0 degrees Centigrade, water freezes.
If you heat ice, it melts.
4）表示现在的习惯动作。如：
If it rains, I go to school on foot.
If I get low marks in the tests, my parents get angry with me.
注意：条件分句在前时其后要加逗号, 而主句在前则不用加逗号。
15. It is one of the world’s most important wetlands.
它是世界上最重要的湿地之一。
one of + 最高级 +名词的复数的意思是“最……之一”。如：
He is one of the most careful young men in our office.
Zushou is one of the oldest cities in China.
16. The area is a great place for wildlife because it provides food and shelter for them. 这个地区是理想的野生生物栖息地，因为它为野生动物提供了食物和庇护场所。
Provide意思为“提供”；provide something for somebody = provide somebody with something，意思是“向某人提供某物”。 如：
The travel agency provides tourists with some water and food.
The travel agency provides water and food for tourists.
17. It is the ideal home for different kinds of plants, fish and birds.
这里是许多植物，鱼类，鸟类生长的理想家园。
Ideal的意思是“理想的”，是形容词，而idea的意思是“主意，想法”，是名词。如：
We have different ideas about the environment problem.
We should have less homework in my ideal school..
18. Many birds live in Zhalong Nature Reserve all year round, and some go there for a short stay. 许多鸟全年都在扎龙自然保护区生活，而有些则去哪儿作短暂停留。
1) all year round意思是“终年，全年”。round是副词，意为“周而复始，从头至尾”。
2) stay 可作名词，意为“停留”。for a short stay的意思是“短暂停留”。如：
Every year we go to the seaside for a short stay.
19. This means there will be less and less space.
这意味着野生动物的生存空间越来越小。
More and more birds are in danger because they do not have enough space.
越来越多的鸟类由于没有足够的空间而濒临灭绝。
less and less + 不可数名词的意思是“越来越少”；fewer and fewer + 可数名词的意思是“越来越少”；more and more + 可数或不可数名词的意思是“越来越多”。如：
The rivers are polluted seriously, so there’s less and less clean water.
To make fewer and fewer mistakes he worked really hard.
More and more technology has been used to improve our life.
20. This year, members of our Birdwatching Club are studying the different kinds of birds in Zhalong and the changes in their numbers.
今年我们观鸟俱乐部的正在研究扎龙地区的各种鸟类及它们的数量变化。
1) study 在这里是“研究”的意思。如：
He is the expert who studies air pollution.
2) the changes in 表示“在… 某方面的变化”；the changes to … 表达“……的变化”。如：
The changes in the ways of learning science help him get good results.
Seeing the great changes to our city, the old got quite happy.
21. Many people do not understand the importance of the wetlands.
许多人明白湿地的重要性。
important 是形容词，意为“重要的”，importance是名词，意为“重要性”。如：
I know it important to protect the wetlands.
I know the importance of protecting the wetlands.
22. If you are interested in birds, you can go to Zhalong.
如果你对鸟类感兴趣，你可以去扎龙。
be interested in something / doing something的含义是“对（做）某事感兴趣”。如：
His little brother is interested in football. / His little brother is interested in playing football.
23. They simply can’t wait for the party next week.
他们简直等不及下周的聚会。
can’t wait for something的意思是“对……急不可待”；can’t wait to do something的意思是“等不及做……”。如：The children can’t wait for the Christmas Party.
The children can’t wait to take part in the Christmas Party.
24. 一般将来时的构成
一般将来时由动词shall(第一人称), will(第二、第三人称)+ 动词原形构成。如：
Shall I open the door? / He will get to the bus stop early.
与一般将来时连用的时间状语有：tomorrow, next week(month/year), in a few days(months/years)等。如：It will rain tomorrow.
The exchange students will leave in a few days.
将来时的其他表示方法：
1) be going to +动词原形。这一结构表示打算或准备好要做的事，或有迹象表明要发生的天气变化等情况。如：We are going to discuss where to go next Friday.
Look at the black clouds. It is going to rain.
2)现在进行时(be+现在分词)。有些动词的现在进行时可以表示将要发生的动作，表示按计划或安排即将发生的事。这类动词有：go, come, leave, start, arrive, return, play, see, meet, write等。如：She is coming to dinner this evening.
I am seeing him the day after tomorrow.
Are we taking an exam next Tuesday?
I am spending my holiday in the Netherlands.
3)一般现在时。一般现在时也可以用来表示按计划将要发生的事情，这时的计划比较客观,更具有不可变动性，因此更正式。如：The peak tram leaves at 8:30 a.m.
The film begins in a few minutes. They leave for Nanjing next Sunday.
25. 方式副词
副词的构成方式：形容词+ly
1) 一般形容词在词尾加-ly。如：clear-clearly，great-greatly，slow-slowly
2) 以辅音字母加-y结尾的形容词，常常把-y改成-i再加-ly构成副词。Happy-happily，easy-easily，heavy-heavily等。
3) 词尾为-le的形容词，通常去-e加-y。如：gentle-gently，simple-simply，terrible-terribly等。如：He runs fast. / He is drawing very carefully. / The old people were looked after well.
26. Some children screamed because they were very frightened.
一些孩子因为害怕尖叫起来。
be frightened的意思是“害怕”。be动词加以-ed结尾的表语形容词连用表示某人的心情。类似的词组有：be excited(感到激动), be amazed(感到惊讶), be surprised(感到吃惊), be pleased(感到高兴), be worried(感到担忧), be bored(感到无聊)。如：
She was so excited that she couldn’t say anything.
The mother is often worried about the child’s health.
I am pleased to have you to be my friend.
The nook is very boring. I felt bored when I read it.
27. People ran in all directions. 人们四处逃散。
Some people ran out of the shopping center. 一些人逃出了购物中心
I tried my best to run out to the street. 我尽力跑了出去，跑到街上。
People ran wildly as pieces of glass and bricks fell down.
当玻璃碎片和砖块不断掉下来时，人们疯狂逃窜。
run的动词短语有：run in all directions/ run out of …/ run out to…/ run wildly。
连续使用体现了人们的惊慌失措。
28. I calmed down ans asked myself, “Did I really survive?”
我冷静下来，问自己：“我真的幸免于难了吗?”
calm down是动词短语，意思 “冷静下来”。如：Don’t be nervous. Calm down.
Survive是动词，意为“幸存，存活”。如：The storm was terrible. Luckily, their family survived.
The little girl survived the earthquake.
29. A moment of fear went through my mind but I told myself to calm down since I was still alive.一阵恐惧袭上心头，但我告诉自己冷静下来因为我还活着。
alive 表语形容词，只能用于系动词之后，充当表语成分，类似的词有：alone，afraid，asleep，awake. 如：The old people feel lonely from time to time.
We are all afraid of snakes.
He fell asleep while he was listening to music.
30. Don’t make excuse, Simon. 别找借口了，西蒙。
这里的excuse意思是 “借口”。做名词使用。excuse也作动词使用，意思为“劳驾，对不起，原谅”。如：The teacher doesn’t believe the students’ excuses.
If I don’t apologize to him, my father won’t excuse me.
31. We could do nothing but walk slowly. 我们在暴风雪中只能慢慢走。
But 在这里作介词，“除了”，常与nothing连用，意为“除了……什么也没有；只有”后面加动词不定时一般省略to。如：There is nothing but a piece of paper in the box.
It is raining hard, so we can do nothing but wait.
Last evening I did nothing but watch sports.
32. 动词不定式：
1）动词不定式的基本形式是“be+动词原形”，有时可以不带to，其否定形式是“not to +动词原形”。动词不定式形式虽然不能作谓语，但是仍然保留着动词的特征，它可以带所需要的宾语或状语而构成动词不定式短语。
2）动词不定式具有名词，形容词和副词的特征，因此它在句中可作主语，表语，宾语，宾语补足语，定语和状语。
A. 作主语 如：To learn English well isn’t an easy job.
To have a talk with her is a great pleasure.
It is important to have good habits.
It takes me half an hour to go to school by bike.
B. 作表语 如：Our plan is to get to the top of the mountain in an hour.
His job is to treat the patients with eye problems.
The girl’s ambition is to be a great dancer.
Our purpose is to achieve a balance between work and play.
C. 作宾语
有些及物动词常用动词不定式作宾语，如：agree(同意), begin(开始), ask(要求), choose(选择), continue(继续), decide(决定), forget(忘记), remember(记得), learn(学习), plan(计划), wish(希望), volunteer(志愿), prepare(准备)等等。如：
They decided to change their diet. He wants to be a computer programmer.
The baby started to talk at the age of eleven months.
D. 宾语补足语
动词不定式可作复合宾语中的宾语补足语，常跟动词不定式作宾补的动词有：advise(建议), ask(请求), encourage(鼓励), invite(邀请), persuade(劝说), remind(提醒), teach(教), tell(告诉), want(想要), warn(警告), wish(希望)等等。如：
My teacher advised me to carry on with my hobbies.
I told the children not to frighten the dog. / They asked me to go shopping with them
E. 定语
动词不定式可以用作修饰名词或代词的定语，用作定语的不定式须跟在所修饰的名词或代词之后。下列名词之后多直接跟动词不定式作定语：ability, agreement, chance, decision, hope, need, offer, plan, request, wish等等。如：
His plan to get success in the game made his parents very happy.
I need a pen to write with. / There are a lot of good novels to read.
F. 状语
动词不定式可以用作修饰动词或形容词的状语，一般放在其所修饰的动词或形容词之后。如：He went to Italy to learn clothes designing.
To get to the office on time, he took a taxi there.
He went back home to find his dog missing.
He is creative enough to be a director.
He is too weak to play football well.
33. 原因状语从句
引导原因状语从句的连词有because, as, since, for等。
1)because表示人们不知道的直接原因或理由，着重在从句，全句的中心意义在从句中。常用于回答why引出的疑问句，语气最强。从句一般位于住户之后。如：
I didn’t go to school yesterday because I had a high fever.
We couldn’t go out for a walk that day because is snowed heavily.
2)since一般表示对方已知的，无需加以说明的理由。即原因显而易见或为既成事实。全句的中心意义在主句中，语气比because弱，但比as强一些。常位于句子开头。如：
Since we have finished all the homework, mother allowed us to go skating last Sunday.
Since we are close friends, we often share secrets.
3)as表示十分明显的原因，一般说明因果关系，重点在主句。解释为“由于……”“鉴于……”，相当于since，但语气更弱。引导的从句常位于句首。如：
As it is stormy, we shall not climb the mountain.
As the house is rather dirty, we have do some cleaning today.
典 题 解 析
1. _______of the two colours is OK. In fact, they are very nice.
A. Both B. Either C. All D. Neither
2. __________ is it from your home to the shopping center？
A. How long B. How often C. How much D. How far
3. Now the air in the city is _______ than it used to be. We must take actions to improve it at once.
A. much better B. much worse C. the best D. the worst
4. Nobody but Mary and her sister ______ from.
A. knows where he is B. knows where is he
C. know where he is D. know where is he
5. The doctor warned him __________ any more.
A. not smoke B. not to smoke C. should not smoke D. don’t smoke
6. Who _______ you English? Miss Cai _________.
A. teaches; does B. is teach; is
C. does teach; does D. teach; teaches
7. There is __________ kangaroo in the zoo.
A. an eight-years-old B. a eight years old
C. an eight-year-old D. a eight-year old
8. My father wrote me a letter __________ harder.
A. encourage me studying B. encourage me to study
C. to encourage me studying D. to encourage me to study
9. We are sure you will find the film _________.
A. interesting B. interested C. interest D. be interested
10. The headmaster ________ the students to leave the school early.
A. made B. let C. had D. ordered
综 合 练 习（A）
I. 单项选择 (16%)
( ) 1. He is getting ________ to hear the ________ words.
A. boring; boring B. bored; boring C. bored; bored D. boring; bored
( ) 2. I think Maths is ________ of all my subjects.
A. much difficult one B. difficult one
C. most difficult one D. the most difficult one
( ) 3. Li Ming spends a lot of time ________ some sports every day.
A. on doing B. do C. to do D. in doing
( ) 4. We will climb the hill if it ________ tomorrow.
A. doesn't rain B. won't rain C. not rains D. is not going to rain
( ) 5. It rained; ________ the football match was postponed (延期).
A. because B. or C. therefore D. but
( ) 6. There were so many people in the park that we had _______ to take a rest.
A. everywhere B. somewhere C. nowhere D. anywhere
( ) 7. Don’t make _____ you should _____ the truth.
A. an excuse, speak B. excuse, talk
C. an excuse, tell D. excuse, say
( ) 8. Don’t forget _____ when you go to bed.
A. to turn it off B. to turn off it C. turning it off D. turning off it
( ) 9. One of the _____ from England.
A. students come B. students is C. student is D. student comes
( ) 10 This boy isn’t old enough _____.
A. to live in his own B. live on his own
C. to live on his own D. live in his own
( ) 11. I don’t know how to____ to my classmates.
A. talk B. saying C. said D. say
( ) 12. We always have a great time _____ films.
A. watching B. watch C. watched D. watches
( ) 13. It’s often _____ in winter.
A. wind B. windy C. winds D. winding
( ) 14. There was _____ snow on the road.
A. lot of B. a little C. many D. a lots of
( ) 15. Let me do the homework by myself, _____?
A. shall we B. will you C. do you D. shall I
( ) 16. We must prevent hunters from _____ wild animals.
A. to kill B. killing C. killed D. kill
IV. 根据句意用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空。(8%)
1. Can I have something ________ (drink)?
2. How far ________ John ________(live) from his school?
3. What ________ he _________(do) next Sunday?
4. Many soldiers ________ (lose) their lives in that battle (战役).
5. I heard them ________(sing) the popular song in the next room.
6. The doctor advised him __________ (eat) less food.
7. An earthquake __________ (take) place in Taiwan in 1999.
8. It is incorrect __________ (hurt) animals here because Zhalong is a nature reserve.
V. 根据短文内容及所给中文意思填出所缺单词。(6%)
Knowing what to do in case of fire is important. If a fire broke out in your home, what would you do? First, you should _______ (警告) everyone in the house about the________ (危险). Don’t panic(恐慌) and start ____________ (尖叫). Be calm and act fast. Second, you and all the others should get out of the house. Don’t stop to take any thing that belongs to you. _________ (一旦) you are out of the house, stay out. Do not go back for any reason. __________ (最后), when you are out of the house, call the fire department. Don’t try to pit out the fire _________(你自己). That can be very dangerous.
VII. 翻译句子。(15分)
1. 咱们俩合用这间卧室好吗?
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Linda不如我跑得快。
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. 你能就如何学习英语给我提些建议吗?
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. 我们在一起交谈总是过得很愉快。
_____________________________________________________________________________
5. 美国英语和英国英语有所不同。
_____________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完形填空。(10%)
A man, dressed as a countryman, was walking along the streets of a large city. He was ____1____ a small parcel（包裹）. It had a name and an address on it. There was ____2____ some writing on it. It said it had 1000 dollars inside. The countryman was looking this way and that. He was certainly ____3____ for the house where he had to put the parcel.
A stranger（陌生人）, passing by, asked him what he was looking for. The countryman
____4____ his parcel. He asked the stranger to read the address on it. “I’ve ____5____it,” he said. “And I don’t know how to ___6___.”
“Why?” asked the stranger. “That’s my name and address. It’s my parcel. It’s from ____7____ old friend, Bob. He promised（答应） to send it to me a week ago.”
The countryman looked ____8____ to hear this. “Take it if it’s yours,” he said. “But you must give me 60 dollars for my ____9____.” The stranger did so. The countryman then got on a passing bus. The stranger went to a quiet corner to look at the parcel. ____10____ it, there was nothing but some pieces of cotton cloth.
( ) 1. A sending B. throwing C. picking D. carrying
( ) 2. A. only B. also C. always D. already
( ) 3. A. riding B. calling C. looking D. asking
( ) 4. A. showed B. lent C. kept D. charged
( ) 5. A. forgotten B. lost C. known D. found
( ) 6. A. start B. speak C. read D. write
( ) 7. A. your B. my C. his D. her
( ) 8. A. sad B. pleased C. angry D. worried
( ) 9. A. trouble B. idea C. present D. message
( ) 10. A. Beside B. Around C. Inside D. Outside
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Dear sir:
Just over six months ago, I saw an advertisement in a morning newspaper for a set of the complete works of William Shakespeare. Your company offered this set at a low price: 15 pounds and 50 pence. I had wanted a set of Shakespeare’s plays and poems for some time, so I sent for them.
Two weeks later, the books arrived, together with a set of the works of Charles Dickens which I had not wanted. So I returned the Dickens’ books to you. Two more weeks passed. Then there arrived a second set of the works of Shakespeare, the same set of Dickens’ books and a set of the plays of Moliere, in French. I don’t read French, and they were not useful at all, so I wrote to you.
You did not answer that letter. Instead you sent me a bill for 42 pounds and a set of the plays of Schiller, in German. I have no room for any more books, and I have no time to read them at all.
Please send no more books, no more bills and no more angry letters for payment. Just send one large truck and take all the books away, leaving me only with the one set of the works of Shakespeare for which I have paid.
Yours
Simon Walker
根据文章内容判断正(T) 误(F)。
( ) 1. The advertisement in the morning newspaper was for a set of the complete works of William Shakespeare.
( ) 2. Two weeks later he got the works of Schiller
( ) 3. Mr. Walker told them to take away all the books except Shakespeare’s books
(B)
One Sunday afternoon John went to the river to fish. It was very cool by the river. It was John’s favourite place. After fishing for some time, John heard the noise of a plane. He looked up and saw smoke coming out of the plane. Then he saw a pilot(飞行员) jump out in his parachute(降落伞). The pilot was falling straight into the forest across the river. John at once knew that he was in trouble. John dropped everything and ran for help.
He soon reached the police station and told a policeman there about the plane and the pilot. The policeman called some of the other policemen and they drove off to the forest. After an hour’s search they found the pilot. His parachute was caught among the trees. He could not cut himself loose(松开). He was very happy to see the policemen and John. A policeman climbed up the tree and cut the parachute cords(绳索). The pilot dropped down. He was not hurt. He thanked John for bringing help for him.
( ) 4. The river was John’s favourite place because it was _________.
A. fine there B. cool there
C. warm there D. pleasant there
( ) 5. When John looked up, he ___________.
A. saw a plane flying in the sky
B. saw smoke coming out of a plane
C. saw a few people in parachutes
D. heard the noise of a plane
( ) 6. The pilot _________________.
A. called out for help B. tried to land the plane
C. smoked and started a fire D. jumped out in his parachute
(C)
Some people believe that classes, teachers and school buildings will no longer be necessary in the near future because of the Internet and other new technology(技术). Perhaps this will be true one day, but if the world has no schools, I can’t imagine(想象) how our society will be. In fact, we should learn how to use new technology to make schools better. We should invent a new kind of school that is linked(链接) to libraries, museums, science centers, labs(实验室) and even companies. Technological companies should create(创造) learning programs for schools. Scientists could give talks through the Internet. TV networks and local stations could develop programs about things students are studying in school. Labs could set up websites to show new technology so students could see it on the Internet.
Is this a dream? No. There are already many cities where this is beginning to happen. Here the whole city is linked to the Internet, and learning can take place at home, at school and in the office. Businesses provide programs for the schools and the society. The schools provide computer labs for people without their own computers at home. Because everyone can go to the Internet, older people use it as much as younger ones, and everyone can visit faraway libraries and museums as easily as nearby ones. How will this new thing of school change the usual way of learning? It is too early to be sure, but it is very exciting to think about it. Technology will change the way we learn; schools will change as well; and we will all learn something from the Internet.
( ) 7. Who think that students don’t have to learn at school?
A. Everyone B. The writer C. Some people D. The teachers
( ) 8. What does “a new kind of school” mean in the passage?
A. A school with many new computer.
B.A school with many new students.
C. A school with many new teachers.
D.A school which is linked to the Internet
( ) 9. Older people_______.
A. never go on the Internet.
B. go on the Internet more often than younger ones.
C. go on the Internet as often as younger ones.
D. go on the Internet less often than younger ones
( ) 10. What the writer thinks is that________.
A. schools are still necessary B. more school should be built
C. there should be fewer schools D. more computers are needed in schools
综 合 练 习（B）
I. 单项选择 (16%)
( ) 1. Yao Ming is one of _____________________ of the world.
A. wonderful basketball players
B. more wonderful basketball player
C. the most wonderful basketball player
D. the most wonderful basketball players
( ) 2.If more and more wetlands disappear, there _________ space for plants, animals and birds.
A. is more and more B. is less and less
C. will be more and more D. will be less and less
( ) 3. The film ________ at 8:20p.m, and I __________ at the cinema in five minutes.
A. starting; arrive B. starts; am arriving
C. will start; arrive D. start; will arrive
( ) 4. How _______ the little girl ___________ !
A. beautiful; is dancing B. beautifully; is dancing
C. beautiful; dance D. beautifully; dance
( ) 5. The teacher told us __________ the door when we left the classroom.
A. not to forget to close B. don’t forget close
C. not forget to close D. not to forget closing
( ) 6. He didn’t start to watch TV programs _______ he finished all his housework
A. that B. until C .if D. because
( ) 7. I’ll play badminton as _______ you do.
A. well as B. better than C. more well than D. good as
( ) 8. We have different ______ in the library, so you can borrow the ones you like.
A. kind books B. kinds of book C. kinds of books D. kind of books
( ) 9. There is going to _____ a snowstorm this evening.
A. be B. have C. come D. hold
( )10. The large hotel can ______________ every tourist.
A. provide nice food and shelter with B. provide nice food and shelter to
C. provide nice food and shelter for D. provide nice food and shelter of
( )11. _________ has long pointed wings and a forked tail.
A. A sparrow B. A swan C. A swallow D. A seagull
( )12. Every year natural disasters kill _________ people.
A. three thousands B. thousands of C. three thousand of D. thousand of
( )13. ______ it was really snowy, it _____ me longer to get to the office.
A. As; took B. Because; takes C. As; spent D. Since; cost
( )14. --- Oh, I came _______ and did not bring my food with me.
--- Never mind. You can have _______.
A. hurriedly; yours B. in a hurry; ours C. in hurry; you D. hurry; us
( )15. Wolves hunt together if they ________ hungry.
A. were B. are C. will be D. won’t be
( )16. The man really don’t know ________.
A. what to do it B. how to go
C. how to say it D. to ask what
IV. 用所给词的正确形式填空 (8%)
1. She can speak both English and Japanese ___________ (fluent).
2. Our plane ____________ (leave) at ten o’clock tonight.
3. He often tells lies, so we all know he is ____________ (honest)
4. The nature reserve is an important ____________ (live) area of the red-crowned cranes.
5. Yesterday Miss King ___________ (wear) a pair of new leather shoes.
6. Giant pandas like eating bamboo __________ (leaf).
7. When he was ________ (trap), he screamed for help.
8. Thunder always comes after __________ (light).
V. 根据所给中文意思填空 (6%)
When we take a walk ________(围绕着) Washington Square Park, I see a lot of people walking with dogs. It is still ________(真的) that a dog is the most useful and faithful animal in the world, but people have __________(改变) the reasons why they keep a dog. Of course, they keep dogs in order to keep ________(安全的). But the most important reason is that they can have friends, because the city can be a ________(孤独的) place. For child, a dog is his best friend when he has no friends to play with. For young couples, a dog is their child when they have no children. For old couples, a dog is also their child when their real children have _________(成长) up. Now can you see the reason why people keep dogs?
VI. 翻译句子 (15%)
1. 艾迪打算明天早晨去市场观鸟。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 越来越多的鸟处于危险中, 因为它们没有足够的空间。
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 一些人不理解保护环境的重要性。
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 扎龙自然保护区是各种不同野生生物的理想家园。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 我表哥对球类运动感兴趣, 包括排球、篮球等等。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 完形填空 (10%)
SARS (非典) has brought us much trouble. However, everything has 1 sides. One side of SARS is already clear. It is serious and over 300 people in China have died of it. But the other side is more important.
SARS makes people realize (认识) that life is valuable (有价值的). Once in April, Wang Xinying, a student in Taiyuan, traveled on the same bus with a sick man who might have SARS, __2 he had to stay at home for 3 two weeks. “ I’m going to treasure(珍惜) my life every day,” he said.
SARS teaches people to be thankful. Many doctors and nurses 4 all their time with people who have SARS, and 5 of them have lost their lives. Another student says he wants to be a doctor when he grows up. “Though they know their job is 6 , doctors and nurses are trying their best to save people ‘s lives. We must learn from them,” he said.
SARS also _ 7_ people to understand the trouble of others. The past few months have been __8_ for Chinese people. But there are some other worse things than SARS in the world, such as war and so on. Think of how the _9_ felt on September 11th, 2001.
Besides, SARS makes people in different countries join together in this special war until they __10_ in the end.
( ) 1. A. four B. three C. five D. two
( ) 2. A. so B. since C. or D. as
( ) 3. A. at first B. at least C. at last D. at once
( ) 4. A. waste B. cost C. spend D. forget
( ) 5. A. none B. all C. few D. some
( ) 6. A. safe B. dangerous C. famous D. favourite
( ) 7. A. wishes B. asks C. teaches D. wants
( ) 8. A. terrible B. popular C. healthy D. happy
( ) 9. A. Frenchmen B. Americans C. Japanese D. Russians
( )10. A. win B. hurt C. fail D. lose
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Three sea lions, who were frightened by the noise from firecrackers(爆竹) on the Eve of the Chinese Lunar New Year, don’t want to perform(表演) in the city of Qingdao in East China’s Shandong Province.
On January 27, the four South American Sea Lions in the Dolphin Hall at the Qingdao Zoo got a big fear from noisy firecrackers nearby. The Dolphin Hall is near the area where firecrackers and fireworks is permitted(被允许).
After 10 days of treatment(治疗), one is fine and is able to perform. However, the three other
sea lions are still so frightened that they don’t want to return to the performing stage and they also hide in the water when they hear any loud noise. Worse of all, sometimes they don’t want to eat.
( ) 1. The sea lions don’t want to perform because _________________
A. they are afraid of seeing people.
B. they were frightened by the loud noise
C. they hate performing in the water
D. they don’t have enough food to eat
( ) 2. The best title of the passage can be ___________.
A. Firecrackers, No Good B. Don’t Play Firecrackers
C. Frightened Sea Lions Go on Strike (罢工) D. Sea lions Are Ill
(B)
Mary and her classmates were in a street in London. The sky was dark. This was Mary’s big day ---her first day in England.
Mary got out of a taxi. The driver carried a very heavy bag for her. They walked through the rain to the front door of a big house.
A small girl opened the door. She was four years old. Her brother stood behind her. He was only two years old. One minute later, a young woman came to the door.
“Welcome to London!” she said and she gave Mary her hand. “These are my two children, Elisabeth and Jerry.”
“Glad to meet you, Mrs. Frost!” said Mary with a strong Spanish（西班牙的）accent（口音）.
The two children ran back into the living room.
“Don’t worry about them! They are a little shy. And please call me Diana! Now let me show you your room and then we can have a nice cup of tea. Or would you like some coffee?”
“This is your bedroom. You can enjoy the view（景色）of the Green Park and here’s a little desk where you can study. The bathroom and toilet are just opposite your door. Now I’ll go and put the kettle on.”
“Excuse me. What’s a kettle?”
“In England we use a kettle to make hot water. We can then put the hot water in a teapot or use it to make coffee.”
Mary was happy with her new home, but she was a little puzzled（困惑的）.Perhaps her mother was right. The British people are quite different. They didn’t kiss when they met each other and they lived in large old houses. Their favorite drink was tea and they used strange kettles to make the water hot. What was she going to say to Elisabeth and Jerry? How could she make friends with two shy English children?
( ) 3. Where did Mary possibly come from?
A. China B. Japan C. the USA D. Spain
( ) 4. Who was Mary’s hostess（女主人）?
A. Elisabeth Frost B. Jerry Frost C. Diana Frost D. Mary Frost
( ) 5. In this passage the underlined word “kettle” means _____________.
A. 茶杯 B. 烧开水的壶 C. 煮咖啡的壶 D. 热水瓶
( ) 6. After reading the passage, we know that _____________.
A. Mary had some trouble in living in London.
B. the two children didn’t like Rosa.
C. Mr. Frost helped Mary a lot.
D. Mary was happy with the family, but she couldn’t understand some of their customs（习俗）.
(C)
Many people think that the dinosaur(恐龙) is the biggest animal that ever lived. They are wrong. The world’s biggest animal is still living, and it lives in the sea. It is called the Blue Whale. Blue Whales can be as long as 30 meters and weigh as much as 1,000 kilos. The largest dinosaurs weighed only 500 kilos.
The whale is not only the world’s biggest animal; it is also one of the cleverest. We know that whales can talk to each other though we don not know what they are saying. We do not yet know how to ‘speak’ whale! One day perhaps we shall learn to speak to whales, and then they will be able to tell us about themselves.
Whales are part of a family of animals called ‘cetaceans’. These are animals that live in the sea but unlike fish, do not lay eggs(产卵). They have live babies in the same way that cows and cats do, and give their babies milk.
There is a famous White Whale called Moby Dick. He was in a story by the American writer, Herman Melville. In his story, a sailor called Captain Ahab spends a lot of tome trying to find and kill Moby Dick.
Sadly, there are not many kinds of whales left. Men have killed them for thousands of years for food and other things. However, there are laws to stop people killing most kinds of whales, so perhaps there will be more of them in the years to come.
( ) 7. The biggest whales are________.
A. small cetaceans B. White Whales C. Blue Whales D. Killer Whales
( ) 8. Whales can ________.
A. live on land B. talk to each other
C. tell us about themselves D. tell stories.
( ) 9. Moby Dick _________.
A. was an American B. had a friend called Captain Ahab
C. liked writing D. was a whale in a story
( )10. There are not many whales left because___________.
A. they do not lay eggs B. there are laws against them
C. people have killed a lot of them D. they live in the sea
初二年级下学期（8B）
Unit 1---3
重 点 词 组
in fact 事实上 get married 结婚
move out of 搬出…… turn into 变成
light rail 轻轨 play Chinese chess 玩中国象棋
noise pollution 噪音污染 the closing of the old airport 旧机场的关闭
take off 起飞 land safely 安全着陆
feel a bit lonely 感到有点孤独 from time to time 不时的
used to be 过去常常 cause problems 引起问题
bring many benefits 带来很多好处 lose one’s living areas 失去居住地
the whole day 整天 as soon as 一……就……
even though 尽管 look cute 看上去可爱
so that 如此……以至于…… a fast-food restaurant 一家快餐店
like apple pies best 最喜欢苹果派 clap our hands 拍手
march across the park 行进穿过公园 can’t stop taking photos不能停止拍照
jump out of it 从里面跳出来 a shiny golden silk dress 一件闪光的金色丝裙
match well with 搭配的好 the bow on her left ear 她左耳上的蝴蝶结
wave to the visitors 向游客挥手 the city center of Tokyo 东京市中心
have some Japanese food吃些日本菜 show them to you 把它们给你看
remote control 遥控 change the channel 换频道
search for information 搜索信息 word processing 文字处理
send and receive e-mails发送接受电子邮件 write computer program写电脑程序
at the same time 同时 the all-time favourite game空前受欢迎的游戏
the main character 主角 lie on the grass 躺在草地上
earn a point 得一分 play the role of 扮演……的角色
be sold out 卖完 a set of keys 一组键
floppy disk 软盘 a short. movable line 一条短的移动的线
a flat piece of plastic 一薄片塑料 hard disk 硬盘
a lot of memory 许多内存
a famous indoor theme park 一个著名的室内主题公园
dance to the music so beautifully 和着音乐优美地跳舞
a thirteen-year-old boy named…… 一个叫……的13岁小男孩
move the cursor on the screen 在屏幕上移动光标
test your knowledge of English grammar and vocabulary 测试你英语语法和词汇的知识
语 法 精 讲
1. He used to live in the Kowloon Walled City in Hong Kong.
他过去住在香港的九龙城。
used to do something.和be used to doing something.
used to do 表示“过去常常做某事”如：
I used to get up at 6 o’clock. But now I often get up at 7 o’clock.
My grandmother used to be a history teacher in a middle school.
be used to doing something表示“习惯于做某事”如：
We are used to reading English very early in the morning.
Are you used to living in Beijing now?
be used to do 表示被“用来做某事”，主语常常是物。
A knife is used to cut something.
Mobile phones are used to communicate with other people.
2. We lived together until 1960 when I got married. 我们一起住直到1960年我结婚。
get married 表示“结婚”。如：I got married in 1997.
marry 可作为及物动词。如：She always wants to marry a rich man.
What kinds of men do you want to marry?
3. Has the place changed a lot? 那个地方变化大么？
*Change 为不及物动词，意思是“变化”。如：
Things have changed a lot in Suzhou.
All of my classmates have changed during these years.
* change into 表示“变成某物”。如：He tried to change iron into gold.
Water changes into steam after it boils.
* change 作为名词。如：Let’s go to a restaurant for a change.
Great changes have taken place in China.
4. The noise was terrible when the plane took off.
当飞机起飞的时候，噪音是很可怕的。
Take off的意思是“起飞”；land的意思是“降落”。
Take off 还有另一个意思，脱下（衣服）。如：
You’d better take off your coat because it’s too hot.
5. Many of them have moved to other areas and I feel a bit lonely from time to time. 他们中的很多人已经搬到了另外的地方，有时我觉得有点孤单。
Lonely的意思是“孤独的，寂寞的”。alone的意思是“独自一人”。如：
The old man lived alone but he never felt lonely.
Don’t feel lonely. You have our support.
from time to time意为“时不时，时而”，等于at times, sometimes。
a bit意为“有一点点”，修饰形容词。如：a bit lonely 有一点孤单
a bit of用来修饰名词。如：a bit of music 一点音乐
6. 现在完成时
现在完成时由助动词have/has后面跟过去分词组成。
现在完成时的两种用法。
（a）一直继续到现在的动作和情况。
我们经常用简单的现在完成时来表示过去开始的动作和情况，这个动作和情况一直延续到现在。
I have lived in Greece since 1976.
We have known each other for a long time.
(b)已经完成的动作和事情
现在完成时常常用来表示已经全部完结的，过去的动作和事情，只是在过去的事情对现在仍有意思是才这么用。
The President has been assassinated. (The president is dead now)
I can’t go on holiday because I have broken my leg. (My leg is broken.)
现在完成时常常与不定的时间副词或表示时间的词组连用。如；
ever, never; before; yet; already; all this year; all my life; so far; during the 20th century; recently; lately; since; for 等等
请注意，since 后面跟着提到某一点时间。而for后面跟着提到一段时间。
She has worked here since 1948.
She has worked here for more than 50 years.
7. I was excited even though we had to wait for two hours before we could get into the house.尽管我们在进入房子以前不得不等上两个小时，我还是很兴奋的。
even though 尽管，如：
Even though it’s hard work, I enjoy it.
Tom tries his best to study English even though he isn’t interested in it.
excited: 感到兴奋的，主语是人。
exciting: 另人兴奋的，主语是物。如：a piece of exciting news
类似的还有：interesting; interested ；surprising; surprised 等等
8. She danced so beautifully that everyone screamed.
她跳地如此的好以至于每个人都尖叫起来。
so……that……的意思是“如此……以至于……”。如：
It was so hard that we had to stop the game.
Everything there was so beautiful that I wanted to live in it.
The box is so heavy that no one can move it.
He ran so fast that other students couldn’t follow him.
so 后面跟的是形容词或者副词
9. Mum and I went to Hello Kitty’s house as soon as we arrived.
妈妈和我一到就去了Hello Kitty的小屋。
As soon as 意为“一……就……”。如：
All of us screamed as soon as we saw the famous star.
We started to take photos as soon as we got there.
当主句是将来时时，as soon as 引导的时间状语从句用一般现在时。
I will call you as soon as I arrive in Beijing.
Please write to me as soon as you get to Shanghai.
You can see a lovely bag as soon as you open that box.
10. 过去进行时
过去进行时表示过去某一时刻正在进行的动作或发生的事，或者表示过去某一阶段一直在进行的动作。
1）过去进行时的基本结构是，was/were+现在分词，否定句是was/were not+现在分词，疑问句是 was/were调到主语前面。如：
I was doing my homework at 9 yesterday evening.
My parents were watching TV at this time yesterday.
2）连词when , while与过去进行时。
A. 当两个延续性动作同时进行时，可以在两个句子中都用过去进行时，并用“while”把它们连接起来。如：My mother was cooking while my father was reading newspapers.
He was sleeping while we were playing cards.
B.当延续性动作进行的过程中发生了短暂性动作，可以用“when”或”while”来连接这两个动作，较长的动作用过去进行时表示，较短的动作用一般过去时表示， “when”和 “while”都可以和延续性动词连用，但短暂性动词只能和 “when” 连用。如：
When mother came home, I was cleaning my bedroom. (我们不能用while替换when, 因为come是一个短暂性动词)
When Simon arrived, Millie was reading a book.
The phone rang while I was having my breakfast.
Hello Kitty waved to the visitors while she was dancing to the music.
11. He is a thirteen-year-old boy who loves traveling.
他是一个喜欢旅游的十三岁的小男孩。
a thirteen-year-old boy的意思为“一个十三岁的男孩”。 thirteen-year-old是一个合成的形容词，year不必用复数，并且这个词一般只能放在名词前面，而thirteen years old则是一个短语，一般放在be动词后面，如：He is 13 years old.
从“They have a six-month-old baby at home.” 这句话中，我们可以知道“The baby is six months old.”。
与此类似的结构：a two-thousand-word letter；a ten-day journey
12. How often do you use your computer to search for information?
你多久一次用你的电脑搜索信息？
意思是查找信息，search for 的宾语一般为查找的对象，而不是被查找的人或场所，而search的宾语为被查找的人或场所。如：The police searched the woods for the lost child.
13. A new educational CD-ROM called “Around the world in Eight Hours” has just come out. 一个新的叫做“八小时环游世界”的教育光盘刚刚发行了。
Come out在句中的意思是“发行”，此外，come out还有很多不同的含义
如： * 出现：The stars came out as soon as it was dark.
* 传开：The news came out that the king was very ill.
* （照片）冲印：The photos I took didn’t come out.
* 结果是： The answer to the sum came out wrong.
14. You will play the role of Itchy Feet. 你将扮演“痒痒脚”的角色。
play the role: 扮演……的角色
play 可以组成很多动词词组，如：
play cards：We often meet in the new park to play cards and Chinese chess.
play football: Do you like playing football?
play the piano: She is good at playing the piane.
play jokes on: On April Fool’s Day, we play jokes on our friends and family members.
play with fire It is very dangerous to play with fire, children!
15．被动语态
1）结构和含义：“Be + 过去分词”表示“被……”。 通常在被动结构后还可接“by + 行为主体”，说明什么人或什么东西做了某事。
如：--- What is this jumper made of? --- It’s made of wool.
--- 这件套头衫是什么料的？ --- 它是用羊毛做成的。
I was asked to meet the head of that company. 我被叫去见见那家公司的领导。
Thousands of beaches are polluted. 几千处海滩被污染了。
The door was broken by the naughty boy. 门被那个调皮的男孩弄破了。
The door was broken by a stone. 门被一块石头打破了。
2）不使用被动语态的动词：系动词、happen、take place、sell well、hang（挂）等。
如：This sweater feels soft. 这件毛衣感觉上去软软的。
When did the traffic accident happen? 这起交通事故是什么时候发生的？
I’m glad to hear that the cameras made in our factory are selling well now.
我高兴地听说我们厂生产的照相机如今的销路很好。
Whose coat is hanging here? 谁的外套挂在了这儿？
3）有些词组使用到被动语态中会发生变化。如，make somebody do something（使某人干某事），let somebody do something（让某人干某事），see somebody do something（看见某人干某事），hear somebody do something（听见某人干某事）等。以上这些短语在被动语态中均必须把第二个动词由原形变为动词不定式形式。
如：The joke made me laugh. 改为被动形式是：I was made to laugh by the joke.
People often see him beat his son. 改为被动形式是：He is often seen to beat his son.
16. I spend about two hours a day doing my homework.
我一天花大约两个小时做回家作业。
spend… (in) doing something 意思是“花（时间、钱）干某事”，后面的动词必须使用动词的ing形式，介词in可省略。另外，spend… on something 意思是“在某事/某物上花（时间、钱）”。有时，两者可以替换使用。
如：My mother spends an hour (in) cooking supper every day.
My mother spends an hour on supper every day. 我妈妈每天花一小时烧晚饭。
How much will you spend (in) decorating your new house?
How much will you spend on your new house? 你要在装修新房上花多少钱？
另外，用于表达“花（时间）干某事”的，还有句型“It takes somebody (一段时间) to do something.”; 用于表达“花（钱）干某事”的，还有句型“something costs somebody (钱)” “it costs somebody (钱) to do something”或“pay (钱) for something”。
如：It takes my mother an hour to cook supper every day.
How much will your new house cost you?
How much will it cost you to decorate your new house?
I will pay much for my new house.
典 例 解 析
1. I have already ______ the magazine for 2 weeks. I must return it to the library today.
A.lent B. bought C. borrowed D. kept
下面列出一些短暂性动词的持续性表达：
arrive---be in borrow---keep buy---have fall ill---be ill
join---be in leave---be away from begin---be on die---be dead等等
2. ---Where are the children?
--- They ________ to Beijing.
A. have been B. have gone C. have left D. have arrived
3. --- _______ has he taught English in this school?
---For 2 years.
A. How long B. When C. How soon D. How often
4. ---Do you still write to your friends these days?
---No. But I used ______ that when I was at school.
A. do B. did C. to doing D. to do’
5. She was very _____________ at the _________ news.
A. surprised; surprising B. surprised; surprised
C. surprising; surprised D. surprising; surprising
6. ______ he is only a five-year-old boy, he knows a lot about Chinese history.
A. Although B. Because C. Since D. But
7. The girl sat in the corner ________ quietly ______ none of us noticed she was there.
A. such; that B. too; to C. so; that D. very; that
8. ______ of them has arrived. So _____ has arrived on time.
A. Nobody; none B. No one; nobody C. None; no one D. None; not any one
9. The old men must _________ politely.
A. be spoken B. be spoken to C. spoke D. speak to
这是一句被动语态的句子，做这题之前先要弄清句子的含义，句子的意思不是老人对别人说话要有礼貌，而应该是，对老人说话要有礼貌，句子用了被动语态，把“老人”这个对象强调了一下，那么，我们就可以排除C和D，在A和B中，到底要不要在 “be spoken” 后面加上 “to”呢？答案是要的，因为在主动语态中， “speak to the old men” 才是对老人讲话的意思，那么改成被动语态，这个 “to”当然是不能省的。
1. It is impossible ______ such a little girl _____ it in such a short time.
A. to; to finish B. of; finishing C. for; to finish D. with; finish
综 合 练 习 （A）
IV. 单项选择 (15%)
（ ）1. The Kowloon Walled City has turned ______ a beautiful park.
A. on B. in C. off D. into
（ ）2. Hurry up! The play ________ already!
A. has begun B. will begin C. begins D. began
（ ）3. ----Where is your mother? ----She _______ the supermarket to buy some food.
A. went to B. has gone to C. has been to D. had gone to
（ ）4. A: Where’s Jim? B: He ______ to London.
A. went B. has been C. has gone D. will go
（ ）The environment ________ in our town recently.
A. improved B. improves C. has improved D. is improving
（ ）6. ----Could I have a look at your new bicycle?
----Sorry, I ________ it to Alice. She _______ to borrow it this morning.
A. have lent; came B. lend; was coming
C. had lent; came D. have lent; will come
（ ）7. Amy _________ a book this time yesterday.
A. was reading B. read C. is reading D. has read
（ ）8. I’m sorry but I __________ my book at home.
A. forgot B. forget C. left D. leave
（ ）9. I’ll tell him the news as soon as he _________ back.
A. comes B. come C. came D. will come
（ ）10. Lucy has _________ bike __________ her twin sister’s.
A. a same; as B. the same; as C. a same; with D. the same; with
（ ）11. ----- Why not organize a school trip? ---- _________.
A. Good idea. B. That’s all right. C. You’re welcome. D. Never mind.
（ ）12. My son wanted ________ the final at home and ______________ his bags.
A. to watch; pack B. watching; packing C. watch; pack D. to watch; packs
（ ）13. After they arrived at the World Park, they ________ the coach ____________.
A. got on; quickly B. got off ; happy C. got on; happily D. got off ; quickly
（ ）14. While Suzy ______ on the sofa, the phone rang.
A. was sleeping B. slept C. sleeps D. is sleeping
（ ）15. The girl is _____ beautiful ____ she may become a film star when she grows up.
A. too; to B. such; that C. so; that D. so; to
V. 词型填空 (15%)
1. I’ll write to you as soon as I _________ (arrive) in Shanghai
2. This piece of music __________ (love) by people all over the world.
3. That kind of pens ________ (sell) well in the shop.
4. I don’t know what _________ (happen)to him just now.
5. This game ___________ (design) by Thomas Smith in 2004.
I have just bought a new computer. It is much faster than the old one. I have bought a _________(打印机) too. It points very quickly. I have a new computer game. It’s a new _______(有教育意义的) CD-ROM called “Around the world in Eight Hours!” It sounds interesting. It is __________（设计）by Nancy Jackson. The main __________(角色) of this game is Itchy Feet. The questions in the game test your ___________(知识) of English grammar and vocabulary. So it helps learn English. Every time you answer a question ___________(正确地), you will get a point. When you have ________(赚)enough points, a cloud will come down and carry you to a place you have__________(从未) visited before. When you play this game, you will play the ________(角色) of Itchy Feet. This game has eight _________（等级）.
VI. 完成句子 (15%)
1．昨天当妈妈回到家时，你正在干什么？
______________________________________________________________________________
2．我已经在苏州市一中读书大约两年了。
______________________________________________________________________________
3．Hello Kitty的屋子是这样的漂亮以至于我想住在里面。
______________________________________________________________________________
4．我过去常常去欧洲旅行。
______________________________________________________________________________
5．她的裙子和鞋子很相配。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 单句改错 (5%)
1. Simon will vote for Max because he have a good sense of humour. ______________
2. Beijing is one of the largest city in China. ______________
3. Could you give us some advice on how to learn Physics good? ______________
4. I like Guanqian Street in Suzhou and I don’t like so many people there. ______________
5. John likes to go to school on feet and he doesn’t mind the rain, either. ______________
VII. 完型填空 (10%)
Some people have very good memories and can easily learn quite long poems by heart, other people have _____1______ memories and can only remember things said again and again. The ______2_____ writer Charles Dickens（查尔斯·狄更斯）said that he could walk down ______3_____ long street in London, and then told you the name of every _____4______ on both sides of the street. Many great men of the world have wonderful memories. A good memory is a
great ______5_____ in learning a language(语言). Everybody learns his own language by remembering what he hears ______6_____ he is a small child. Some children live with their parents in foreign(外国的) countries and they can learn two languages as easily as one. In school it is not so ____7_______ to learn a foreign language because students have so ______8_____ time for it and they are busy with other subjects as well. A man’s mind is quite like a camera(照相机) and it takes pictures of _____9______ we see, feel, hear, smell and taste. When we take a real picture _____10______ a camera there is much work to do before the picture is finished and ready to show to our friends. In the same way there is much work to do before we can keep a picture in our memory for a long time.
( ) 1. A. bad B. good C. poor D. slow
( ) 2. A. English B. French C. Chinese D. Japanese
( ) 3. A. an B. any C. the D. some
( ) 4. A. man B. home C. tree D. shop
( ) 5. A. help B. thing C. use D. work
( ) 6. A. before B. after C. during D. when
( ) 7. A. difficult B. necessary C. easy D. important
( ) 8. A. little B. few C. much D. long
( ) 9. A. where B. what C. which D. when
( ) 10.A. in B. on C. at D. with
VIII. 阅读理解 (20%)
A
In the future cookers will be ready for you to cook a complete meal at the touch of a switch. Television will tell you prices at the shops and news and entertainment (娱乐). Videophone (可视电话) will bring pictures as well as sound. Machines will control (控制) temperature, lighting, entertainment, washing and gardening. Lighting serves as wallpaper and it will make your room look nicer.
At work robots (机器人) will take over most jobs in factories. Working hours will fall to under 30 hours a week. Holidays will get longer. Men and women will retire (退休) at the same age. The home will become the center of entertainment through television and electronic (电子的) games. More people will eat out more than they do today, also they will have a lot more kinds of food.
There will be more foreign travels. Non-stop flights will be cheap. Hobbies (消遣，嗜好) and education (教育) will become more and more important.
( ) 1. The main idea of this passage is that ____________.
A. there will be great changes in your work and life next century
B. you’ll eat more and work less in the year 2010
C. people will spend less time at home next century than they do now
D. hobbies and education will become more and more important
( ) 2. Machines will control temperature so that ____________.
A. you won’t run a fever any more
B. you won’t feel hot in summer or cold in winter
C. rivers won’t freeze in winter
D. there’ll be no temperature
( ) 3. You can get light from ____________.
A. electric lamps B. wallpaper C. lighting D. stars
( ) 4. “Non-stop flights” means that “____________”.
A. the plane will not stop on the way
B. the plane will be always flying, without a stop
C. the plane won’t stop but you can get off the plane
D. the plane will fly anywhere as you like
( ) 5. Life in the 21st century will be ____________.
A. more exciting and enjoyable
B. easier but less interesting as machines or robots will do most jobs instead of you
C. simpler and easier so that you won’t need high education any more
D. too expensive and more people will go to have fast food
B
David hated spending money. When he had to buy something in a shop, he always tried his best to knock down the price, even for the cheapest things. If he wanted to buy a bottle of orange, for example, and the shopkeeper asked for $2, David would say, “Make it $1.90 and I’ll buy it.” Sometimes the shopkeepers agreed to reduce their prices a little. “What’s ten cents?” they asked themselves. “If it makes this man happy, it won’t hurt me very much.” In this way David saved a few cents here and a few cents there, and by the end of the year he had saved several hundred dollars.
One day he had a very bad toothache and had to go to the dentist. The dentist looked at the tooth and said, “This tooth will have to come out. It’s too serious to save.” “How much must I pay you to take out a tooth?” David asked. “Forty dollars,” the dentist said. “How long will it take you to pull out the tooth?” he asked. “About two minutes,” the dentist answered. “Forty dollars for two minutes’ work!” he shouted, “That’s robbery (抢劫).” The dentist smiled. “You’re right,” she said. “Thank you for telling me. I’ll pull your tooth out very slowly. How about if I take half an hour?”
( ) 6. In the passage the underlined word “reduce” means “____________”
A. feel worried about B. be interested in
C. get higher D. make less
( ) 7. How much had David saved by the end of the year?
A. A few dollars. B. Thousands of dollars.
C. Three or more hundred dollars. D. Three hundred dollars.
( ) 8. After the dentist answered David’s question, he became very _________.
A. angry B. sad C. afraid D. worried
( ) 9. David thought that two minutes was ____________.
A. too little time to pull out a tooth
B. too little time to pay the dentist $40
C. too long to pull out a tooth
D. too short for the dentist to finish the operation
( ) 10. What kind of person do you think David was?
A. He was very strict with others. B. He was very clever.
C. He was very generous. D. He was very stingy.
综 合 练 习 （B）
IV. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1. I don’t know if I _______ free tomorrow. If I ________ free, I will fly to Beijing with you.
A. am; am B. am; will be C. will be; am D. will be; will be
( ) 2. I have ________ friends than you, and Jim has _____________ of us.
A. fewer; the fewest B. fewer; the least C. less; the least D. less; the fewest
( ) 3. _________ interesting information it is!
A. What B. What an C. How D. How an
( ) 4. What were you doing during the Spring Festival? I ____ Thailand at that time.
A. am visiting B. will visit C. were visiting D. was visiting
( ) 5. _________ you ever ___________ the Great Wall?
A. Have; gone B. Have; been C. Did; go D. Will; go
( ) 6. My father has worked there ___________.
A. since five years B. since 1990 C. for five years ago D. five years
( ) 7. Sanrio Puroland is ___ big that you need a ____ day to visit it.
A. so; whole B. such; whole C. such; all D. so; all
( ) 8. At last, my dream has come _________.
A. true B. real C. fact D. truth
( ) 9. It _________ him half an hour to drive home every day last year.
A. cost B. spent C. paid D. took
( ) 10. Have you decided ___________?
A. what to go B. where to go C. how to go D. which to go
( ) 11. I hope you _______ to my party next Sunday.
A. to come B. come C. will come D. came
( ) 12. This game ____ well. Get it now before it _____ out.
A. is sold; is sold B. sells; is sold C. sold; sells D. sells; sells
( ) 13. Good luck with your Chinese exam. _________
A. Thank you B. No, I’m not lucky. C. Good luck to you. D. You’re welcome.
( ) 14. Mille picks _________ apples than Amy on the farm yesterday.
A. many more B. much more C. very more D. very much more
( ) 15. Tom shouldn’t ______ at only because he made a mistake..
A. laugh B. laughed C. be laughed D. laughing
V. 动词填空 (15%)
1. I will say “ I love you, Daddy.” as soon as he _______(wake) up.
2. She makes me ________(dance) at Nanshan Stadium every Sunday afternoon.
3. –--Would you mind ________(take) photos with me?
--- Of course not. When I ______ (miss) you, I can have a look.
4.The headmaster ordered the students _______(leave) school early.
5.People are often killed while _________(穿越) the road. Most of them are old people and ________(孩子). Old people are often killed because they are careless. People should look and ________(听) before they cross the road. A car, a truck or a bus can’t stop very ________(快)if it is going very fast. It will travel many meters before it _________(停下). Pedestrian don’t know this. They think that a car can stop right away. It is hard for a pedestrian to _________(知道) how fast a car is traveling. The only ________(安全的) way to cross the road is to look at _______(两面) ways, right and left. The ________(正确的)way to cross the road is to walk quickly when the traffic ____(信号灯) turn green.
VI. 完成句子（10%）
1．自从Eddie出生以来，它一直和Millie生活在一起。
______________________________________________________________________________
2．苏州工业园区在最近的十年里变化很大。
______________________________________________________________________________
3．春天是游览中国园林的最好时间。
______________________________________________________________________________
4．我想得到一些关于苏州，无锡，上海包价旅游的信息。
______________________________________________________________________________
5．公主的头发被恶毒的巫婆剪短了。
______________________________________________________________________________
VIII. 完型填空 (10％)
In the USA, children start school when they are five years old. In some states they must stay in school _____1____ they are 16. But most students are 17 or 18 years old when they ____2____ secondary school. There are two kinds of schools in the USA: public schools and private schools. ____3____ children go to public schools. Their parents don’t have to ____4____ their education because the schools ____5____ money from the government. If a child goes to a private school, his parents have to get enough money for his schooling. Some parents still ____6____ private schools though they are much more expensive. Today about half of the high school students _____7_____ in university after they finish secondary schools. A student at state university does not have to pay very much if his parents _____8____ in that state. Many students ______9_____ while they are studying at university. In this way they get into _____10______ working habits and live by their own hands.
( ) 1. A. and B. though C. till D. since
( ) 2. A. leave B. come C. study D. pass
( ) 3. A. Several B. Most C. A few D. Few
( ) 4. A. worry about B. pay for C. ask for D. make sure
( ) 5. A. lend B. spend C. get D. cost
( ) 6. A. go B. hate C. like D. mind
( ) 7. A. play B. miss C. change D. study
( ) 8. A. were born B. travel C. visit D. live
( ) 9. A. work B. study hard C. do sports D. read books
( ) 10.A. good B. bad C. well D. better
IX. 阅读理解 (20％)
(A)
“Other countries have a climate, in England we have weather,” Englishmen often say. This really lets us know something about England and it is true. From these words we see Englishmen believe that what happens in England is not the same as what happens in other places. And any foreigner staying in the country for longer than a few days will be sure of the truth of the words. Only in England, it has been said, can one go through four seasons in one day. The day may begin as a gentle spring morning, an hour or so later black clouds may have appeared from nowhere and it may rain heavily. At noon it may become winter and the temperature may drop by eight or more degrees. And then in the late afternoon the sky will clear up, the sun will begin to shine, and for an hour or two before darkness falls, it will be summer. In England one can go through almost every kind of weather except the best or the worst. ( some foreigners seem to think that for ten months of the year the country is covered by fog, this is not true.) We never know when the different kinds of weather will occur（发生）. Not only do we get a few different kinds of weather in one day, but we may get a winter weather in summer and a summer weather in winter.
( ) 1. “Other countries have a climate, in England we have weather,” What does this mean?
A. England people like their weather very much.
B. In England there’s only one season in a year.
C. In England the weather is always changeable.
( ) 2. What does the writer mean by “one can go through four seasons in one day?
A. English weather is always bad.
B. English weather is most changeable.
C. There are more than four seasons in England.
( ) 3. How many seasons can one actually go through in England in one day according to the paragraph（段落）
A. 3 B. 4 C. 2
( ) 4. Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?
A. There is not extreme（极端）weather in England.
B. Different kinds of weather may occur suddenly.
C. For ten months of the year England is covered by fog.
( ) 5. What question may the passage answer?
A. What is weather? B. What is English weather like?
C. What’s the difference between climate and weather?
(B)
During the last ten years, our cities were full of cars, buses and trucks. Now the streets are completely crowded and it is very difficult to drive a car along them. Drivers must stop at hundreds of traffic lights. What are our cities going to be like in ten or twenty years? Will many highways be built across them? With big highways cutting across them, full of noisy, dirty cars and trucks, our cities are going to be awful places. How can we solve the problem? There are some good ideas to reduce the use of private cars. In 1971, for example, the authorities（官方）in Rome began an interesting experiment: passengers on the city buses did not have to pay for their tickets. In Stockholm there was another experiment: people paid very little for a season ticket to travel on any bus, train or tram all over the city. In many cities now some streets are closed to vehicles（机动车）and pedestrians are safe there. In London there is another experiment: part of the street is for buses only, so the buses can travel fast. There are no cars or taxis in front of them.
( ) 6. What does the writer worry about in a big city?
A. The number of traffic lights. B. The shortage（缺点）of buses.
C. The lack of highways. D. The traffic is very crowded.
( ) 7. Which city once experimented on a completely free bus service?
A. London B. Paris C. Rome D. Stock
( ) 8. Which city once experimented on a very cheap bus service?
A. London B. Stockholm C. Rome D. None of the above
( ) 9. In many cities people are much safer because ___________.
A. no traffic is allowed in some streets B. traffic is computer controlled
C. cars move very slowly D. only one way streets are open to traffic
( ) 10. In Chinese “pedestrians” means ___________.
A. 司机 B. 行人 C. 旅客 D. 动物
Unit 4---6
重 点 词 组
only if 除非 advertise on the Internet 在因特网上做广告
give out leaflets 散发传单 donate money 捐钱
organize a charity show组织慈善表演 return to school 回到学校
choose me to be the host选我做主持人 because of 因为
start working on the show为表演开始工作 introduce each star 介绍每个明星
practise a lot 练了很多 at the right time 在正确的时间
in the beginning 一开始 a little bit easier 容易一点点
keep asking myself 不断问我自己 make a lot of noise 制造噪音
volunteer to do 志愿做…… set up the stage 布置舞台
design the poster 设计海报 pocket money 零用钱
be used to doing 习惯做…… used to do 过去常常……
too weak to walk 太虚弱不能走路 mostly in poor countries大部分在贫穷的国家
medical treatment 医学治疗 a flying eye hospital 一家飞行眼科医院
volunteer doctors 志愿者医生 watch the operations on video在录象上看手术
during my visit 在我访问过程中 operate on 150 patients 给150个病人做手术
be really grateful to you 真的感谢你 carry on with our work 继续我们的工作
send donations to 捐款给…… fund-raising activity 筹款活动
care about other people 关心别人 train for a charity walk 为慈善行走训练
a tough hike 一次艰难的旅行 an excellent chance 一次极好的机会
learn team spirit 学习团队精神 be recorded 被记录
support teams 支援队 keep you comfortable 让你保持舒服
at least 至少 go up hills 上山
the process of growth 成长的过程 look down on 看不起
pay attention to 注意 mobile phone 移动电话
provide somebody with something 给……提供……
raise money for Project Green Hope 为希望工程筹集资金
have a lot of support from local businesses 从当地企业得到很多支持
80 per cent of the cases of blindness 80%的失明病例
group themselves into a team of four people 把他们组成四人小组
walk two days and nights without sleep 走两天两夜不睡觉
walk through eight country parks 走过八个乡间公园
plan what you are going to carry 计划你要带的东西
support development projects 支持发展计划
finish walking a 100-kilometre trail within 48 hours在48小时内走完100公里
语 法 精 讲
1. Only if you sleep less during the day.
除非你在白天睡的少点。
Only if的意思是“除非”。如：
I’ll come only if you promise me that you won’t invite her.
You can be a host only if you practice a lot.
2. The Class 1, Grade 8 students want to raise money for charity.
八年级一班的同学想为慈善事业捐款。
raise money for charity的意思为“为慈善组织筹集资金”，介词用for。而donate money to charity的意思为“为慈善组织捐款”，介词用to。如：
organize a charity show: 组织一次慈善表演
help with a charity show: 帮助组织慈善表演
3. It was exciting buy I was also very nervous because of the TV cameras.
我非常兴奋，但以为电视镜头，我也非常紧张。
1) because of意思是“因为”，后面跟名词，代词和动名词。如：
I came back because of the rain.
She walked slowly because of her bad leg.
2) Because的意思也是“因为”，但后面跟从句。如：
I came back because it rained heavily.
She walked slowly because she hurt her leg.
4. It is my job to introduce each star. 我的工作是介绍每个明星。
It 是形式主语，动词不定式to introduce each star 是真正的主语。句型结构为：It+be+形容词或名词+动词不定式。
It is my duty to take care of my brother.
It is difficult to learn English well.
5. Slowly, everything became a little bit easier
慢慢地，每件事都变了容易了一点。
a bit 意思是“有一点”，“稍微”，可以修饰形容词，动词，介词短语；a bit of 意思也是
“有一点”，但只能修饰不可数名词。如：
I am a bit tired. / My foot still hurts a bit. / He’s not a bit like that really.
Let’s have a bit of music.
I give the birds in the park a bit of bread every morning.
6. Everyone was very generous and we had a lot of support from local businesses
每个人都很大方，我们从当地的企业得到很大的支持。
support 在这里是名词. 如9A中有一个词组：have parents’ support 有父母的支持
support 也可以作动词使用。如：Which football team do you support?
7. hope 和 wish
* hope之后的宾语从句，谓语动词常用一般现在时或一般将来时。表达的希望是能够实现的。如：I hope she likes (will like) the flower.
I hope I will become a doctor when I grow up.
* hope 之后也可跟一个动词不定式，这一结构可以表达更有把握的希望和计划。
I hope to spend a year in America after I leave school.
* wish之后可以跟一个动词不定式。如：I wish to go abroad for further study.
* wish之后的宾语从句，谓语动词用虚拟语气，所表达的愿望是无法实现的。如：
I wish I were a bird.
I wish I hadn’t say that.
* wish somebody to do something. 如：I wish the manager to be informed at once.
* wish 后面跟形容词，名词。如：I wish you well.
I wish you good luck.
I wish you a happy journey.
8. Blindness affects about 45 million people around the world, mostly in poor countries. 失明影响了全世界约四千五百万人，大多数在贫困国家。
affect在这里的意思是“影响”。如：
Different colours can affect your moods.
Smoking affects health.
Mostly在这里是副词，在这里意思是“主要地”。如：
The students are mostly from China.
She uses her car mostly for her job.
9. ORBIS uses a flying eye hospital to visit poor counrries.
奥比斯使用一做飞行眼科医院来访问贫困的国家。
a flying eye hospital 一座飞行眼科医院
flying:飞行的 a flying object 飞行物
flying 在本句中是形容词，还有其他的固定用法，如：
flying visit: 非常短暂的访问
Get off to a flying start: 旗开得胜
flying 还可以做名词，意思是，飞行，如：I don’t like flying. It makes me feel sick.
10. Volunteer doctors perform operations on patients
志愿者医生给患者做手术。
1) volunteer doctors: 志愿者医生，volunteer是名词。
volunteer 还可以做动词，意思是，自愿做某事, 主动做某事。
He volunteered to help me move.
My friend volunteered to tell me an interesting piece of news.
2) perform operations on somebody的意思“ 给某人动手术”。operate on somebody的意思是“给某人动手术”。
11. We teach them new skills and knowledge.
我们教他们新的技术和知识。
teach them new skills and knowledge解释为“教他们技能和知识”。
skill意为“技能”，是可数名词。Knowledge意为“知识”，是不可数名词。
12. People must be really grateful to you.
人们可肯真的非常感谢你。
Be grateful to somebody=be thankful to somebody意思是“感谢某人。如：
I was most grateful to John for bringing the books.
13. 直接引语和间接引语
1)话人在转述他人的话时，可以一字不改的加以引用，被引用的话在语法上被叫做“直接引语”
Dad said, “ I am going to London with my friend.”
说话人用自己的话转述别人的话时，可以对原话有所更改，这叫做“间接引语”
Dad said that he was going to London with his friend.
2) 如果要转述的话是事实，自然现象或所述内容仍是真的，则时态不需要变化。
Our teacher told us, “ The earth moves around the sun.”
Our teacher told us that the earth moves around the sun.
(地球绕着太阳转是客观真理，所以时态不变。)
She said, “I miss my son very much when I am away.”
She said she misses her son very much when she is away.
(时态不变是因为所述内容还是真的)
* 如果主句的时态为现在时或一般将来时，则间接引语中的动词时态也不要变化。
He says, “I forgot to bring my homework yesterday.”
He says that he forgot to bring his homework yesterday.
3) 直接引语转为间接引语的句式变化。
* 陈述句变为以that引导的宾语从句
He said, “I like playing football.”
He said he likes playing football.
* 一般疑问句变成以if/whether 引导的宾语从句
He asked, “Are you a teacher, Amy?”
He asked Amy if/whether she was a teacher.
* 特殊疑问句变成以who, what, when等疑问词引导的宾语从句。
She said, “Where are you going, Tom?”
She asked Tom where he is going.
* 祈使句变为动词不定式。
My mother always says to me, “Don’t play computer games all day!”
My mother always tells me not to play computer games all day.
14. Oxfam Trailwalker has been one of Hong Kong’s biggest fund-raising events since 1981. 乐施会毅行者活动是香港自1981年以来最大的筹款活动之一。
One of Hong Kong’s biggest fund-raising events 香港最大的筹款活动之一
One of 表示“……之一”，后面加形容词的最高级，名词的复数形式。如：
Changjiang River is one of the longest rivers in China.
Suzhou is one of the most beautiful cities all over the world.
15. It was known as Trailwalker before. 以前它被叫叫 “毅行者”。
Be known as的意思是“被认为是”。如：
She is known as a great singer.
16. People over eighteen can group themselves into a team of four people and join this charity walk. 年满十八岁的人可以把他们自己组成四人小组，参加这个慈善行走活动。
group themselves into a team of four people
把他们组成四人小组
group 在句中是动词，意思是“使集合”，“使成组”
They grouped themselves into teams of eight people.
They grouped themselves around the teacher.
Group也可用做名词，意思是“小组”
Our group is on duty this week.
A group of them are going to Beijing in a month.
17. Oxfam Trailwalker is a tough hike because you have to finish walking a 100-kilometer trail within 48 hours.
乐施会毅行者是一次艰苦的行走因为你必须在48小时内走完100公里。
a tough hike 一次艰苦的行走
tough 在这里的意思相当于 difficult, 修饰something。
tough 如果修饰somebody 如：a tough man, 则表示“一个不好相处的人”
a 100-kilometre trail 100公里的路
100-kilometre 为复合形容词，构成方式是：数词-名词（单数）-形容词
如：a 13-year-old boy 一个十三岁的男孩 / a three-storey building一幢三层楼的房子 a two-thousand-word letter 一封两千字的信
18. It means you may have to walk two days and nights without sleep:
这意味着你必须两天两夜不睡觉
sleep 在这里是名词，如：get enough sleep
sleep也可作动词使用。如：It’s time for you to sleep.
和sleep 有关的词组还有：fall asleep入睡；feel sleepy觉得瞌睡。
19. Warm and dry clothes are also necessary to keep you comfortable:
温暖干燥的衣服对于保持舒适也是必须的。
keep+名词+形容词的意思为“使……处于……状态中”。如：
My work kept me busy all day.
此外，keep doing something表示“一直做某事”。如：
I have kept doing my homework for 2 hours.
I am sorry to keep you waiting for so much time.
20.The money is used to help poor people and to support development projects.
钱是被用来帮助穷人和支持发展计划的。
be used to do的意思是“被用来”。如：
The recorder is used to help you learn English well.
The computer is used to search for information
21. Why not try your best to help people in need?
为什么不尽你的努力来帮助有困难的人呢？
Why not+do sth 表示提出建议。
Why not go out for a walk?
People in need: 困难的人。People in trouble:有麻烦的人
22.This will be an experience you will never forget. 这将是我永远难忘的经历。
Experience的含义是“经历”，是可数名词。experience 也可作“经验”讲，是不可数名词
如：Our teacher always tells us his interesting experiences in England. （经历）
He has a lot of teaching experience. （经验）
23. It is + 形容词+that 从句
It 是形式主语，that从句才是真正的主语。如：
It is sad that some people are blind.
It is wrong that we look down on disabled people.
It is necessary that we learn English well.
It is important that you have your own support team.
24. It is+形容词+动词不定式
It is difficult to walk through eight country parks.
It is useful to have support teams.
It is necessary to learn English well.
It is easy to give seats to the elderly.
25. It is +形容词+for sb.+动词不定式
It is important for us to support him.
It is meaningful for us to help Ben.
It is important for him to learn some computer skills.
It is difficult for Joan to finish the work within 10 days.
26. 主语+be 动词+形容词+动词不定式
The article is easy to understand.
The story is interesting to read.
The event is meaning to organize.
The problem is difficult to solve.
典 例 解 析
1. I am sorry I can’t ________ the name of the TV play.
A. think hard B. think about C. think over D. think of
2. The boy usually spends his spare time _______ football.
A. play B. playing C. to play D. plays
3. I ______ you will write me back soon.
A. wish B. need C. want D. hope
4. The ship ________ radio signals for help before it sank.
A. gave off B. gave out C. gave up D. gave away
5. The man was remembered as a hero ______ he gave his life for his country.
A. due to B. because of C. because D. thanks to
6. Must we finish the work today? No, you ____.
A. mustn’t B. don’t have C. don’t have to D. needn’t to
7. Teaching young children is _______, but the teachers always _____.
A. a hard work; hard work B. hard work; work hard
C. a hard work; work hard D. hard work; hard work
8. Yesterday I _____ TV ______ a stranger broke in.
A. watched; while B. was watching; when
C. watched; when D. was watching; while
9. ---You’d better hurry, my dear.
--- Just a minute. It won’t _____ me much time to change.
A. spend B. take C. cost D. pay
10. Will it be a __________?
A. successful B. succeed C. success D. succeeded
综 合 练 习 （A）
IV. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1._____ the beginning, we didn’t like English, but now we like it very much.
A. In B. With C. By D. To
( ) 2. My mother will come home ______ a month.
A. after B. on C. in D. by
( ) 3. That mp3 is _________ expensive. I can’t afford it.
A. bit B. little C. a bit D. a bit of
( ) 4. It’s difficult ____ you to learn English _____.
A. of; good B. of; well C. for; good D. for; well
( ) 5. I recommend you to buy this book because it is _______.
A. a such good book B. a good such book
C. such good a book D. such a good book
( ) 6. I am sorry that I have kept you ______ for so long.
A. waiting B. wait C. to wait D. waited
( ) 7. How terrible! Now I am getting _____________.
A. fat and fat B. fatter and fatter C. much fat D. more and more fat
( ) 8. I ______ get up at 6 o’clock. But today I got up at 7.
A. used to B. be used to C. use to D. am used to
( ) 9. Now Doctor Li is used to ________ on many patients every day.
A. operate B. operating C. operation D. operates
( ) 10. They are ____ poor ____ they can’t go to school.
A. too; to B. so; to C. so; that D. too; that
( ) 11. ORBIS is a charity that helps ____ people.
A. blind B. deaf C. poor D. rich
( ) 12. We didn’t go out yesterday _____ it rained heavily.
A. because B. because of C. that D. so
( ) 13. We need enough money to ______with our work.
A. put on B. turn on C. try on D. carry on
( ) 14. Tom is a hard-working boy and he has spent all his money _____ books.
A. with B. for C. on D. about
( ) 15. May I _____ the book for two weeks?
A. buy B. borrow C. lend D. keep
V. 词型填空 (15%)
1. I _________ ( talk ) with my friend on the phone when father came back home last night.
2. Have you finished ___________ ( read ) the book yet ?
3. Spring is the best time __________ ( go ) traveling.
4. ------- When _________ your parents __________ ( get ) married? ------ In 1995.
5. Boys and girls, I have something __________(重要的) to tell you. We will _________(举行) a walk next Sunday. The name of the walk is “Walk for children”. The __________(目的) of the walk is to _________(筹集) money for the __________(慈善组织) called ___________(工程)Hope. Your ___________(捐赠)can _________(提供) children with food, clothes, and a _________(机会) to study. We will start at 10 o’clock that morning and we will walk from our school to South Hill. Don’t be ________(迟到).
VI. 完成句子（15%）
1．他过去常常一天给两三个病人动手术。
______________________________________________________________________________
2． 病人不必付治疗费用。
______________________________________________________________________________
3．我希望我是一只小鸟。
______________________________________________________________________________
4．慈善表演十天后举行。
______________________________________________________________________________
5．如过需要的话，带着你的雨伞。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 单句改错 (10%)
1. It is a excellent chance for people to learn team spirit. ___________
2. I am used to eat a lot of fruit. ___________
3. The fans were very excited because of they saw Jacky Chou. ___________
4. We want to go out for a walk so it is cool outside. ___________
5. Students will get a lot of knowledges in our school. ___________
VIII. 完型填空 (10%)
Someone says, “ Time is money.” But I think time is even more important than money. Why? Because when money is 1____ , we can get it back. However, when time is 2____ , it’ll never return. That is 3____ we mustn’t waste time.
It goes without saying that time is usually limited. 4____ a second is very important. We should make full use of our time to 5_____ something useful.
But it is a pity that there are a lot of people who do not 6_____ the importance of time. They spent their 7_____ time smoking, drinking and playing. They do not know that wasting time means wasting part of their own 8______ .
In a word, we should save time. We shouldn’t 9______ today’s work for tomorrow.
Remember we have no time to 10_____ .
( ) 1. A. taken B. lost C. made D. spent
( ) 2. A. finished B. saved C. gone D. limited
( ) 3. A. why B. what C. that D. because
( ) 4. A. For B. Even C. In D. But
( ) 5. A. make B. bring C. do D. invent
( ) 6. A. hear B. see C. feel D. know
( ) 7. A. limited B. enough C. spare D. less
( ) 8. A. time B. food C. life D. money
( ) 9. A. stop B. leave C. let D. give
( ) 10.A. lose B. save C. take D. spend
IX. 阅读理解 (20%)
(A)
Thomas Alva Edison was given more patents on inventions than any other Americans. When he died in 1931, Americans wondered how they could best show their respect(尊敬) for him. One suggestion was that the nation observe(实行) a minute or two of total blackout. All electric power would be shut off in homes, streets and factories.
Perhaps this suggested plan made Americans realize fully what Edison and his inventions meant to them. Electric power was too important to the country. Shutting it off for even a short time would have led to complete confusion(混乱). A blackout was out of the question.
On the day of Edison’s funeral(葬礼), many people silently dimmed(使暗淡) their light. In this way they honored the man who had done more than anyone else to put the great force of electricity at his countrymen’s fingertips.
( ) 1. Which was invented by Edison?
A. bomb B. printer C. pc D. light
( ) 2. This passage says that Thomas Edison ___________ .
A. was the only important American inventor
B. received the first American patent
C. received more patents than any other Americans
D. was the first American inventor
( ) 3. The suggested plan was to ___________ .
A. turn off the lights in factories and schools
B. observe a few minutes of total silence
C. dim all electric lights
D. shut off all electricity for a short time
( ) 4. The plan was never carried out because __________ .
A. not everyone wanted to honor Edison
B. it was too difficult
C. electric power was too important to the country
D. it only honored one of Edison’s invention
( ) 5. The word “patent” means __________ .
A. 尊敬 B. 概念 C. 专利 D. 财富
（B）
The great fire of 1666 started in the house of a person who made bread in Pudding Lane, near London Bridge. In four days it destroyed four-fifths of the city as it then was, where most of the houses were made of wood. Thirteen thousand houses including one hundred churches, the Royal Exchange, even the Guild-hall(会馆) itself went up in the fire. About 100,000 people became homeless. Yet in about ten years all the houses had been rebuilt, and all the famous buildings, too.
Why could the fire cause such great pain and loss? In the early days there were no teams of men who put out fires. Since then firemen were made up and Fire Service Stations were developed quickly.
( ) 6. The great fire began in a _______ .
A. church near London Bridge B. hotel next to the Guild-hall
C. place where bread was cooked D. building in Pudding Lane
( ) 7. Guild-hall is the name of a ________ .
A. famous building B. common house C. city in British D. church in London
( ) 8. The underlined phrase “went up” means _____ .
A. fell into a trap B. were set up C. still remained D. were destroyed
( ) 9. The fire made so many people homeless because ________ .
A. the houses were all made of wood at that time
B. the fire couldn’t be controlled quickly
C. the firemen didn’t arrive soon enough
D. the old houses needed to be built again
( )10. The passage suggests that _______ .
A. nothing can control fire B. there is not enough water in London
C. fire is the most dangerous to people D. bad things can be turned to good
综 合 练 习 （B）
IV. 单项选择 (15%)
( ) 1. It’s wrong for us to _______ blind people.
A. look down on B. look after C. look for D. look up
( ) 2. I hope you _______ your journey home.
A. will enjoy B. to enjoy C. enjoys D. are enjoy
( ) 3. I can speak Japanese ________ my Japanese friend.
A. as good as B. as well as C. better as D. so well as
( ) 4. I don’t think she ______ so much exercise.
A. need B. needs C. need to do D. needs doing
( ) 5. How much money have you donated _____ three years ago?
A. for B. about C. in D. since
( ) 6.______ they were all tired, ______ of them stopped walking.
A. Although; none B. Although; but none
C. Because; neither D. Because; none
( ) 7.______ exciting advice it is!
A. What an B. What C. How D. How a
( ) 8. Shanghai is only 90 kilometers ________ from Suzhou.
A. far B. far away C. away D. away far
( ) 9. UNICEF is a charity to help _____________ in the world.
A. blind people B. deaf people C. poor children D. old people
( ) 10. Everyone should be treated with _______.
A. kind B. kindly C. kinder D. kindness
( ) 11. A knife _________ the back door by the boy.
A. was used to open B. was used to opening
C. used to open D. used to opening
( ) 12. I was very hungry, _____ I asked for something to eat.
A. than B. for C. because D. so
( ) 13. He is a teacher with a lot of _______. He often tells us some of his interesting _________in Africa.
A. experience; experience B. experience; experiences
C. experiences; experiences D. experiences; experience
( ) 14. Jack ______ be in the library. He is playing football on the playground.
A. must B. can C. need D. can’t
( ) 15. Have you heard ___ a fund-raising event _____Project Hope?
A. from; called B. of; called C. from; calling D. of; calling
V. 词型填空 (15%)
1. I’m very happy when the __________(organize) chose me to be the host.
2. He kept _________(run) to keep fit.
3. Finally,I _________(pass) the exam because I worked hard.
4. There is so much work that we need a lot of __________(volunteer).
5. I’d like to go shopping instead of _________(go) hiking.
6. Helen Keller was a ________(聪明的)and beautiful girl. At the age of six months, she
could ________(已经)say a few words. But before she was 2 years old she was _______(严重地) ill. She could not see or hear, and soon she could not ________(甚至)talk. When she was six, her parents ___________(雇佣)a teacher for her. With the help of the teacher, she began to see and hear the world around her ________(通过)her hands. She learned to read books for the__________(盲人). She also learned to swim and ride a horse. After she _________(成长)up, she became a famous writer in America. Her first and most_________(著名的) book is “The story of my life”. Her story has brought new hope to many blind and deaf people. It gave light to those in darkness and _________(鼓励)them to live and work.
VI. 完成句子 (15%)
1.我工作地如此努力是因为我希望这次演出圆满成功。
______________________________________________________________________________
2. 一天三次吃药是很重要的。
______________________________________________________________________________
3. 因为雨下的很大，所以发洪水了。
______________________________________________________________________________
4. 对他来说，参加写作俱乐部是很有趣的。
______________________________________________________________________________
5. 妈妈告诉我世界上的很多地区污染是个大问题。
______________________________________________________________________________
VII. 单句改错 (10%)
1. Teacher told us that the Red Cross starts in 1863. _____________
2. They kept to ask me a lot of questions. _____________
3. It is necessary for I to practice a lot before the walk. _____________
4. It is a excellent chance for people to learn team spirit. _____________
5. The fans were very exciting because of the star. _____________
VIII. 完型填空 (10%)
There are a lot of services in Britain for people with 1 or no eyesight. Every week on the radio there is a2 for them. It has news—shopping reports and travel reports. It has a “Helpline”. You can 3 for more information. Some towns have dorection signs in Braille(盲文). 4 tall buildings, the number of the floor is on Braille 5 too.Shops have them too. If you want to buy some meat, it’s6 to find the sign outside the door. You can also get a “guidedog”. It is your “7”. You hold a handle and the dog walks8you. It will wait by the roadside. When it is9, it will take you10 the road.
( ) 1. A. good B. little C. much D. many
( ) 2. A. report B. book C. magazine D. newspaper
( ) 3. A. read B. phone C. write D. answer
( ) 4. A. Outside B. Behind C. Inside D. From
( ) 5. A. signs B. symbols C. marks D. letters
( ) 6. A. difficult B. hard C. easy D. unnecessary
( ) 7. A. nose B. eyes C. ears D. mouth
( ) 8. A. beside B. behind C. away from D. in front of
( ) 9. A. dangerous B. busy C. quiet D. safe
( ) 10. A. across B. cross C. crossing D. crossed
IX. 阅读理解 (20%)
A
In many English homes people eat four meals a day: breakfast, lunch, tea and dinner. People have breakfast at any time from seven to nine in the morning. They eat porridge( 粥 ),eggs or bread. English people drink tea or coffee at breakfast. Lunch comes at one o’clock. And afternoon tea is from four to five in the afternoon and dinner is about half past seven. First they have soup(汤),then they have meat or fish with vegetables(蔬菜). After that they eat some other things, like bananas, apples, or oranges. But not all English people eat like that. Some of them have their dinner in the middle of the day. Their meals are breakfast, dinner, tea and supper. And all these meals are very simple(简单的).
( ) 1. Many English people have _________meals a day.
A. two B. three C. four D. three or four
( ) 2. People may have ________for their breakfast.
A. tea and eggs B. porridge, eggs, bread, tea or coffee
C. tea and coffee D. bread and eggs
( ) 3. People have lunch at_______.
A. any time B. nine C. five D. one
( ) 4. People don’t have ________for their dinner.
A. Porridge B. bananas or apples C. soup and meat D. meat or fish
( ) 5. In some English homes dinner can come_______.
A. at one o’clock B. at any time C. at noon D. in the evening
B
A good way to pass an exam is to work hard every day in a year. You may fail in an exam if you are lazy for most of the year and then work hard only a few days before the exam. If you want to be good at English, you have to read stories in English. And speak English as much as possible. A few days before the exam you should go to bed early. Do not go to bed late at night studying. Before you start the exam, read carefully over the question paper, and try to understand the exact meaning of each question. When you have at last finished your exam, read over your answers. Correct the mistakes if there are any and be sure that you have not missed anything out.
( ) 6. If people want to do well in an exam, they have to work hard______.
A. for most of the month B. everyday in a year
C. for only a few days D. late at night
( ) 7. If people want to learn English well, they _____.
A. only need to learn grammar B. must often practise English
C. have to go to England D. should go to bed early
( ) 8. It’s important to _____ a few days before the exam.
A. play too much B. have a good sleep
C. read the question papers D. have a good drink
( ) 9. When people have finished the exam, they should_____.
A. stand up and leave at once
B. answer a few more questions
C. make sure that they have not missed anything out
D. leave some mistakes on the question paper.
( ) 10. The best title for this passage is _____.
A. An Important Exam B. An Easy Exam
C. An difficult Exam D. How to Pass an Exam
听力内容
7A Unit 1-3
综合练习（A）
I. 1. seat 2. /e/ 3. 718 4. 6:45 5. his box
II. 1. Where is the teacher’s office? 2. Welcome to my home!
3. I can’t find my purse. 4. What’s your favourite animal?
5. Please have a look at my new gloves!
综合练习（B）
I. 1. Would you mind if I open the window?
2. How often do you go to the cinema in a month?
3. Is that Miss Wang speaking?
4. Hi! Sue. Can you go skating with me?
5. How do you like this movie?
II. 1. W: This Sunday is my friend, Kate’s birthday. I’d like to send her a birthday card.
M: Which one would you like, the one with a dog or a goat?
W: I like the one with a horse.
Q: What year was Kate probably born?
2. W: Look! That boat looks like a duck, and the girl is singing. Can you hear?
M: Yes. It’s very nice.
W: Would you like to go boating, too?
M: That’s very interesting! Let’s go!
Q: Where are they talking?
3. M: What sport do you like best, Lily?
W: Swimming. What about you, Tom?
M: I like volleyball.
W: Do you play it very often?
M: Yes, certainly!
Q: What sport does Tom like?
4. W: I hope it will be fine tomorrow. I’m going fishing with Kate.
M: No problem.
W: Are you sure?
M: Yes. I heard it on TV.
Q: What will the weather be like tomorrow?
5. W: Hi, Ben. Do Mary, Ann and you all sit in Row 4 on the right hand side of your classroom?
M: No. Mary and I sit there and Ann sits behind me.
Q: Where does Ann sit?
III. Long long ago, when the birds flew over the world, they saw that man had a beautiful thing. It was a bright, burning thing. Man cooked their food and kept themselves warm with it. The brids thought life would be better if they could have this thing, too. So they decided to send a messenger to human to ask for a little piece of it. They thought Chicken was a good one to send because he was a good talker. So Chicken went.
He flew far over the forest until he came to the towns of man. He went into a tjown and saw the burning thing. He learned that it was called “fire”. He did not ask for a pece of it to take to the brids because there was so much food lying around man’s houses that he started eating and forgot what he had come for.
Man liked Chicken because he crowed very early in the morning, and woke them up. They let him run in and out of their houses. They threw him food. So Chicken stayed with man. He never went back to the brids. He even forgot how to fly.
7A Unit 4-6
综合练习（A）
I. 1. How long does a football match last?
2. Can you get some books for me?
3. We have to meet the other classmates at the school gate, don’t we?
4. Have you ever been to Qingdao?
5. You’d better stay in bed and have a good rest.
II. 1. W: Are these cards for your mother?
M: Yes, today’s Teachers’ Day.
Q: What’s his mother?
2. W: How about some dumplings?
M: Oh, no. Thank you. I want some cakes. You know they are my favourite food.
Q: What does the man prefer?
3. M: I would like a bamburger and a coke, please.
W: OK! Here you are! That’s $2.50.
M: I think that’s wrong. It can’t be $2.50, it’s $2.15.
W: Sorry.
Q: How much should the man pay?
4. W: Have you heard from your brother since he went to London?
M: Yes, I received his letter last Wednesday. And I wrote back to him last week.
Q: Where is the man’s brother?
5. W: There is a good movie on TV tonight.
M: Oh, yes? Which one?
W: “The Golden Pond”. It has been shown a few times in the past.
M: Too bad. I have to be on duty in the hospital tonight.
Q: What will the man do tonight?
III. A young man married a young woman from a nearby village. They lived with the man’s big family---his parents, his brothers, their wives and their children. The family kept an elephant. The young woman soon took great interest in it. Every day she gave nice food to the elephant.
Three months later the woman quarreled with her husband and went back to her parents’house. Soom the elephant didn’t want to eat and work. It seemed to be ill and heart-broken. One morning after several weeks the animal disappeared form the house.
It went to the womean’s home. When it saw her, the elephant touched her with his long nose. The Young woman was so happy that she went back to her husband’s home.
综合练习(B)
I. 1. How old are you, Miss Zhang?
2. Excuse me, may I use your mobile phone?
3. How long have you been in Sydney?
4. What is your favourite drink?
5. How are you getting on with your new job?
II. 1. W: Excuse me, which is the way to the animal world?
M: Go down this road and you can see it near the post office.
Q: Where is the animal world?
2. W: What’s the weather like?
M: According to the weather report, the rain will stop in two days. It’ll be sunny and hot.
Q: What’s the weather like now?
3. W: Hello. This is Betty speaking.
M: Hello, Betty. This is Tim. May I speak to Mrs. Read?
W: I’m sorry, she is out at the moment. Can I take a message?
Q: Who is the message for?
4. W: Why didn’t you come to the party last night?
M: No one told me about that. So I just stayed at home by myself.
W: It was my birthday party.
M: Oh, I’m really very sorry.
Q: Why didn’t the man go to the party?
5. W: Can I help you?
M: Yes, I’d like to borrow the book “Who moved my cheese”. And this is my library card.
Q: What is the name of the book?
7B Unit 1-2
综合练习 (A)
I. 1. Would you like to live in the palace?
2. The capital of France is Paris.
3. Madee’s home town is beautiful and quiet.
4. I share a bedroom with my sister.
5. There are 12,026 students in the university.
II. 1. May I speak to Neil, please?
2. I live in a wooden house. What about you?
3. What can you see in your bathroom?
4. How many rooms are there in your house?
5. I live on the third floor. Jim lives 2 floors above me. Which floor is Jim on?
综合练习 (B)
I. 1. You can go walking to Sunshine Park because it’s not far away.
2. I often go to the youth center to meet my friends every weekend.
3. We are so thirsty that each of us needs a big cup of water.
4. How many cooks are there in the famous restaurant?
5. They watch plays or shows at the big theatre twice a month.
II. 1. How much beef shall we get?
2. How many hours of sports do your classmates do every day?
3. The party we held yesterday was really great, wasn’t it?
4. Which is your favourite vegetable?
5. I sit behind Joy and in front of Sandy. Where does Joy sit?
7B Unit 3-4
综合练习 (A)
I. 1. Their friend Susan lived nearby in Hill Building.
2. A man in police uniform caught the robber at once.
3. Turn right when you come to the crossroads.
4. There is no plant life without lightning.
5. They were frightened to hear some strange noise.
II. 1. What time do you usually go to school?
2. Excuse me! May I borrow your bike?
3. How many students are there in your class?
4. Thank you for helping me.
5. How was the weather yesterday?
综合练习 (B)
I. 1. He used a knife to open the door again. It worked.
2. When the teacher came in, the two boys stopped talking.
3. Walk past the wooden house and you’ll see a bridge.
4. The weight of the elephant is about 4,500 kilos.
5. There was something unusual behind the bushes.
II. 1. Where did you find the cat?
2. How do you usually come to school?
3. Do you know whose books these are?
4. How many do you want?
5. Who looked after your mother when she was ill?
7B Unit 5-6
综合练习 (A)
I. 1. Mrs. Wang wanted to buy a shirt for her daughter.
2. She is a careless girl. She often makes mistakes.
3. Jim taught me how to make a kite yesterday.
4. Did you do anything for your own safety?
5. Every week they visit a home for the elderly.
II. 1. I am sorry I was late.
2. What day is it today?
3. Let’s go to the park. But how shall we go there?
4. I hope you have a good weekend.
5. Where can I see a doctor?
综合练习 (B)
I. 1. The medicine only cost the girl one dollar.
2. Mr. Black came into the classroom with a smile on his face.
3. The dog often hunts me with eye open wide.
4. My cat likes sleeping on the edge of the piano.
5. We learned about how pets live and how to look after them.
II. 1. How did you like the seafood?
2. What is the matter, Lucy?
3. Which one is not right about your pets?
4. My cat has very long fur. I can find its fur all over the flat.
5. I don’t like playing basketball. I will lose the game within 5 minutes.
8A Unit 1-3
综合练习（A）
I. 1. How do you like your school life?
2. How about going shopping after school?
3. Could you help me do it?
4. They are amazing, aren’t they?
5. How long does it take to get to the Summer Palace By Underground?
II. Many years ago, in a small town, there lived a doctor. He was good and kind. At any time of day and night, he was always ready to go and help sick people. Everyone in the town liked him and people always went to him when they were sick.
But many years went past and the doctor became old. He began to lose his memory. This made him do foolish things sometimes. When people noticed this, they didn’t go to him any more.
“He may give us the wrong medicine,” they said and they were afraid.
“Why does no one come to see me now?” he wondered. But no one wanted to tell him because they didn’t want to hurt the good old man, so they said,” You have cured all the sick people in the town. There is no one sick now.” The doctor was pleased when he heard that and they went away happily.
综合练习（B）
I. 1. W: Is it Wednesday today?
M: No, it’s Thursday.
W: Oh, we’ll have an English party tomorrow, won’t we?
M: Yes.
Q: When will they have an English party.
2. W: Are you better today, Dick?
M: Yes, a little better. Thanks. But I still can’t walk.
Q: What’s wrong with Dick?
3. M: Would you like to visit the museum with me tomorrow?
W: Yes, sure.
M: Where shall we meet?
W: Let’s meet at the school gate?
M: When shall we meet?
W: What about nine o’clock?
M: Ok, see you then.
Q: When and where will they meet?
4. M: Hello, Kitty, how is China?
W: Oh, it’s you, Peter. It’s winter now. it’s very cold here.
M: But I’m very hot. It’s the hottest season in a year here in New Zealand.
W: How lucky you are! I wish I could come to your place now.
Q: Where is Peter now?
5. M: Hi, Kitty. Let’s go and fly kites tomorrow.
W: Well, the newspaper says it’ll be rainy.
M: Then how about making kites at home?
W: Good idea!
Q: What are the two speakers going to do tomorrow?
II. David Beckham was born in London in 1975. His father used to help him practise his football skills in the park when he was a young boy. When he was 12, he won a football award. By the time he was playing for Manchester United. His first goal for them was in 1992. David wrote a book in 1998. In 1999 he married singer Victoria Adams. They have two sons. He became captain of the English football team in 2000. In 2003 he moved to a team in Spain. Later the same year, the Queen of England gave him an important award. David is one of the most famous football players in the world.
8A Unit 4-6
综合练习(A)
I. 1. There are many such animals in the north of Africa and they can help people work.
2. It looks like a white mouse when it is ten days old.
3. I like the bird very much because it has the most beautiful feathers of all the birds.
4. Its nose is very long and its ears look like fans.
5. This earthquake killed more than one thousand people.
II. James Herriot was born in Scotland in 1915. He grew up with a pet dog named Don. So his favourite animal is dog. He loved all animals and would like to be a doctor for animals. He often helped people treat animals. The owners of the dogs were very happy when their sick dogs were better. He said, "To help animals is helping people." Because they can help a person feel less
lonely.
综合练习（B）
I. 1. How nice your watch is.
2. Have you heard a strange sound?
3. Why not take a walk after supper?
4. How much are these apples.
5. How are you going to spend this weekend?
II. Li Ming is going to England. He wants to know something about English people. One day he sees an English girl in the street. Then he comes up to her.
“Excuse me! May I ask you some questions?”
“You are welcome,” answers the girl in a friendly way.
“I’m going to London. What must I know about when I’m talking with people there?” asks Li Ming.
“Well, don’t ask a woman how old she is and…”
“But how old are you?” Li Ming stops the girl and asks her.
“I …” the girl isn’t happy.
“ Why aren’t you happy?” asks Li Ming, “Now we are in China, not in England, you know?”
Questions:
1. What does Li Ming want to know before he goes to England?
2. Where does she meet an English girl?
3. Does the girl like to answer the question about her age?
4. Why isn’t the girl happy?
5. Why doesn’t Li Ming say sorry to the girl?
8B Unit 1-3
综合练习(A)
I. 1. What’s your school life like?
2. Which subject is your favorite one?
3. Where do you usually have lunch, at school or at home?
4. Which season are we in now?
5. What is the most important festival in China?
II. 1. W: It’s sunny today. Let’s go for a picnic with your friends.
M: Good idea! Where shall we go?
W: Over there, on the hill.
Q: What are they going to do ?
2. W: Excuse me, how can I get to the nearest shopping mall?
M: Go straight, then turn right at the third crossing.
W: Is it far?
M: No, it’s only about three hundred metres away.
Q: What do you know about the woman ?
3. W: Don’t you think Tom runs fastest?
M: Yes, Mike runs faster than him.
W: What about Bob?
M: Bob runs faster than Tom but a little more slowly than Mike.
Q: Who runs the most slowly?
4. W: Could you mend this bike for me, Jim? M: I’m afraid I can’t.
W: Who can mend it then, do you know? M: My brother, I think.
W: Would you ask him to help me, please? M: I’ll be glad to.
W: Thanks a lot.
Q: What’s wrong with the woman?
5. W: Tom, What time do you usually get up?
M: I used to get up at 6 o’clock. But today I got up at 7.
Q: What time did the woman get up today?
III. A dog was walking past a butcher’s shop. He saw that the butcher was busy talking to a woman outside the shop. He also saw that there was a lot of meat at the back of the shop.
“I’ll steal a piece of meat,” the dog thought. So he walked inside and went to the back of the shop. He picked up a big piece of meat in his mouth and ran away. He could not believe his good luck.
The dog lived across the river from the butcher’s shop. As he was crossing the bridge to go home, he saw something moving in the water. The dog looked down and saw himself in the water. But he thought it was another dog with a piece of meat.
“That dog’s piece of meat is bigger than my piece,” the dog thought. “I think I’ll take it. Then I’ll have two pieces of meat to eat.” The dog opened his mouth to take the other piece of meat and his own piece fell into the river. Now the dog had no meat at all.
综合练习(B)
I. 1. Thank you for organizing the charity walk.
2. Have you finished reading the magazine?
3. How do you like China?
4. How often is Trailwalker held ?
5. Which country is the world’s highest mountainin?
II. 1. A: We have to stop our car at the first crossing.
B: Why?
A: Because a bus hit an old man.
Q: Where did the traffic accident take place?
2. A: How much is this kind of shirt?
B: It was sixty yuan each last week, but you can pay only half for it now.
Q: How muchis the shirt now?
3. A: Excuse me, are you from Japan?
B: Yes, why?
A: Could you tell me what time it is in Tokyo now?
B: Well, here in Beijing , it’s8:00am and it is one hour earlier in Tokyo.
Q: What time is it in Tokyo now?
4. A: What are you doing, lily?
B: I’m studying English.
A: Why are you studying English? You don’t like it.
B: We have to do it because English is used more and more widely.
Q: Why is lily studying English now?
5. A: Is trailwalker a tough walk?
B: Yes , it’s very difficult. People have to walk100km within 48hours.
Q: How soon will people have to finish walking 100km?
III. In the past all letters were sent by train or ship. Now most letters are still sent just as in the past, but some are sent by air. It took 12 days to send a letter from England to India by ship or train before. But it can get there by air in five days now, and soon the time may be made shorter. At first people were afraid to send letters by air. They thought the plane might fall and their friends might not get the letters, so they sent two letters, one by air ,the other by ship or train .they wanted to make sure that the letter would be received. Planes are now always as safe as trains and ships.
More and more letters are sent by air now.
8B Unit 4-6
综合练习(A)
I. 1. Have you ever been to the Kowloon Walled City?
2. How did you go to HongKong last summer?
3. Which of the following places of interest is famous in Italy?
4. What food did you like best at Sanrio Puroland?
5. How often do you use your computer to search for information?
II. 1. W: Have you seen my food, Eddie? It was in the bowl half an hour ago.
M: Yes. I’ve just eaten it.
W: What? Why did you eat my food?
M: Because I was very hungry.
Q: Why did Eddie eat my food?
2. W: How long have you known the Kowloon Walled City?
M: I’ve known the place for many years.
W: Oh, how many people lived in the Kowloon Walled City in the past.
M: About thirty thousand people.
Q: How many people lived in the Kowloon Walled City in the past?
3. W: I saw you in the computer room yesterday afternoon, Simon. What were you doing?
M: I was looking for some photos of London for my projec.
Q: What was Simon doing in the computer room?
4. W: What can I do for you?
M: Can I have some information about traveling to Singapore?
W: Yes, of course! Here you are.
Q: What does the man want to know?
5. W: I have a new computer game. Would you like to play it?
M: Oh, yes, what is the game called?
W: It is called “Travel around the world”.
M: It sounds great.
Q: What are they talking about?
III. In the doctor’s waiting-room, the patients, men and women, old and young , were sitting quietly on the chairs , waiting for their turn . Billy, a school-boy, was sitting there, too. They all looked very sad except Billy. He was reading an interesting story in a magazine, and there was a smile on his face. Just them the doctor came in to say he was ready for the next patient; Billy jumped up and ran into the doctor’s room.
“Good morning, Doctor.”
“Good morning. What’s your trouble, young man?” asked the doctor. Before Billy could answer a word, the doctor made him lie down on a bed.
“Now, let me listen to your heart.” Billy tried to speak, but the doctor told him not to say anything.
“I’ll take your temperature.” Billy tried to sit up, but the doctor stopped him. “Now open your mouth ---Mm, good.” After a moment, the doctor said. “Well, my boy, you haven’t got a fever. It’s nothing serious ---Mm, in fact, there’s nothing wrong with you.”
“I know there isn’t.” said the boy. “I just came to get some medicine for mum.”
综合练习(B)
I. 1. You’ve eaten my supper. Why?
2. What is Sanrio Puroland?
3. Do you mind telling me how to use this function?
4. What did the host of the charity have to do?
5. What is ‘Walk for Children’?
II. 1. M: How can we help elderly people?
W: We can help them do something difficult.
M: What about the blind?
W: We can help them cross the road.
Q: How can they help elderly people?
2. M: I will take part in Trailwalker. Will you support me?
W: Sure, it’s meaningful to support charities.
Q: Will the woman support the man?
3. M: Is it easy to be trailwalkers?
W: Of course not, the walk itself is not easy-going up hills, without sleep and with tired bodies.
Q: Can the trailwalkers sleep during the walk?
4. M: What do I need to do if I want to join a charity walk?
W: Pay attention to the weather first .You must carry enough water because you need to drink a lot of water during the walk. It is wise to take a map and a mobile phone.
Q: Is it wise to pay attention to the weather?
5. M: Have you heard about Project Hope?
W: Yes. It was set up in 1989. It was set up to help students and schools in poor areas.
Q: What is Project Hope?
III. Most Americans don’t like to get advice from member of their families. When they need advice, they don’t usually ask people what they know. Instead many Americans write letters to newspapers and magazines. They can get advice on many different subjects , such as family groups , the use of language , health , cooking , child care , clothes , and how to buy a house or a car .
Most newspapers print letters from readers with problems. There are answers written by doctors, lawyers or educators. But two of the most famous writers of advice are women without special training for this kind of work. One of them is called “Dear Abby” by readers and the other is called “Dear Ann Landers”. Experience is their preparation for giving advice.
9B Unit 1-4
综合练习（A）
Ⅰ. 1. Would you like to have a picnic with us?
2. When did their parents come home?
3. Are you feeling better today?
4. Morning! May I borrow your bike?
5. What does your father say about traveling?
Ⅱ.1. W: Hello! Tom! Do you like swimming?
M: Yes, I do. I go swimming almost every day, even in winter.
Q: How does Tom like swimming?
1. M: Which sport are you in today, Mary?
W: I’m not doing anything. What about you, Allan?
M: I’m in the surfing race.
Q: Which sport is Allan in?
3. W: Hi, Bob? Congratulations! You did very well in the relay race. All the classmates speak highly of you.
M: Thank you. It was nothing really.
Q: Why did the classmates speak highly of Bob?
4. M: Alice and Ann jumped very far.
W: Yes. But Han Meimei jumped farther than Alice and Ann. She did very well today.
Q: Who do you think won the long jump?
5. W: What did you do last Sunday, Jack?
M: I went canoeing together with Bob. And we had a very good time.
W: Do you often go canoeing?
M: No, only once a month.
Q: Which statement is true?
综合练习(B)
Ⅰ. 1.May I go out and have a picnic?
2. Thanks for your help.
3. What time shall we meet?
4. Wow, what a beautiful cake!
5. What does your mother do?
Ⅱ. 1. W: Eddie, shall we go shopping today?
M: I’m far too busy to go shopping.
W: Busy? But you have nothing to do, except watching TV and sleeping.
Q: Isn’t the man very busy?
2. W: What kind of TV programmes do you like best?
M: I like watching CCTV news. I find it interesting.
W: I don’t like it. I think it’s boring.
Q: Why doesn’t the woman like CCTV news?
3. W: Would you like to be a singer?
M: Yes, I’d love to. What about you?
W: I don’t have a good voice like you. I’d rather be an actress. I like acting.
Q: What would the man like to be?
4. W: Eddie, why are dressed like a detective? Who are you looking for? A murdered?
M: No, this is much more serious. My food has gone missing.
Q: What is Eddie looking for?
5. M: I hear you are moving to a new house soon.
W: I have to because the man in the room is singing song all the time, and I can’t sleep.
Q: Why is the woman moving to a new house?
III. One day a Chinese student went to study in England. His family name was Sun, it was the name of the English word “sun”. England is a country with bad weather. It is often cloudy and it rains very often, so the people there don’t get much sunshine in the whole year. When the Chinese student got to London, a tall policeman with a long face opened his passport and looked at it. The policeman became very glad to find the Chinese name “Sun” in the passport. He thought it was just like the English word “sun”, so he said to the Chinese student, “See your name is Sun. We need you here!” The Chinese student was greatly surprised. But after a moment the policeman began to smile, “Mr Sun, You came to England with the sunshine! So we don’t want you to go away.”
1. Why did the Chinese student go to England?
2. What’s the weather like in England?
3. How did the Chinese feel when he heard what the policeman said?
4. What do you think of the police man?
5. Why didn’t the policeman want the Chinese student to go away?
参考答案
7A Unit1-3
综合练习(A)
I. B, A, D, C, B II. D, A, C, B, B
III. 1-5: D B A B B 6-10: D D D C A 11-15: C D A B C
IV. 1. babies 2. studies 3. eating 4. well 5. Is
V. 1. Joanna doesn’t often do any cleaning on Sunday.
2. The boy doesn’t have an eraser.
3. Which student is a top student?
4. They don’t have (any) watches.
5. My grandmother gave me some chocolates as a treat yesterday.
VI. invention, past, until, found, Even, field, families, taken, because, difficult
VII. 1. Daniel wears a pair of glasses, but he is good at playing computer games.
2. Does he read English for 15 minutes every evening?
3. My new classmates are all nice to me.
4. We do morning exercises twice a week at school.
5. How are you going to celebrate Christmas?
VIII. 1-5: C B A C D 6-10: D D B A C
IX. A) B A B A D B) C B A D C
X. We had a school trop on November 3. On that day, we started at seven thirty in the morning. We went there by bus. We spent an hour and a half on the way, then we got to the Sunshine Park. Many of us boated in the lake and had lunch in the park. After that, we went to the City Zoo. There were many kinds of animals. You could take pictures with pandas or feed pandas. We returned to school at four thirty in the afternoon. Though we felt tired, we enjoyed ourselves.
综合练习(B)
I. B, C, D, D, C II. D, B, B, A, A
III. B, A, D, C, B
IV. 1-5: D B C B B 6-10: C B A C D 11-15: C B B A C
V. 1. them 2. her, hers 3. sing 4. second
VI. 1. Is the girl behind you his sister?
2. My friend rushes into the classroom.
3. What do you like doing at lunchtime?
4. I spend two hours a day doing my homework.
5. I like volleyball best.
VII. has, stamps, swimming, worst, harms bodies, public, care, temper, build
VIII. 1. The girl under the tree is tall and slim. She is a polite student.
2. What did you do on the evening of December 24? We had a party.
3. Every weekend, he always spends more than an hour drawing.
4. Does your cousin know a lot about the foreign festivals?
IX. 1-5: A C B C B 6-10: D D B D B
X. A) C B D D B B) C D A B B
7A Unit 4-6
综合练习(A)
I. C, A, B, B, A II. B, D, C, B, C
III. C, B, C, B, B
IV. 1-5: B D A B B 6-10: C B D C B 11-15: A C C A D
V. 1. interesting, Trainer 2. dislike 3. cities 4. best
VI. 1. to discuss 2. finishes 3. eating 4. will, be sent, ask
VII. spent, full, traffic, bookshelf, carry, always, minutes, poorer, tied, narrow
VIII. 1. It’s very exciting to have a basketball match.
2. Those Germans won’t buy any books there any more.
3. Who is the King of the UK in the 1540s?
4. If you want to keep fit / healthy, you should have a health diet.
5. Please wait for your turn to pay for this coat.
IX. 1-5: D C A B D 6-10: B C A C D
X. A) B C C D B B) C D B A C
XI.
综合练习(B)
I. A, D, B, A, B II. A, A, C, D, B
III. 1-5: A C C A A 6-10: D B C B C 11-15: B C A B C
IV. 1. watches 2. is, don’t put 3. are practising 4. does, do; reads, cleans
5. to fly 6. buying, seeing
V. 1. needs, him, carry, supermarket 2. sure, is, discount, on
3. much, does, cost, you 4. preferred, to, buy, cheaper
5. also, sports, shops, next
VI. 1. Is the lady over there asking for help?
2. What’s near your school?
3. What are they doing in the playground?
4. How much does he often spend on his lunch every day?
5. Sandy is running at school now.
VIII. 1. I---me 2. floors---floor 3. to---for 4. always are---are always
5. writes---writing 6. play---playing 7. reading---to read
8. go---goes 9. doesn’t---doesn’t do 10. visits---visited
IX. 1-5: C C A C C 6-10: B D D C B
X. A) D B A B B B) D A B C C
7B Unit 1-2
综合练习 (A)
I. CABDB II. ACBAD
III. 1-5 CDCCC 6-10 CDAAD 11-15 CBDBB
IV. 1. wooden, wood 2. dinner, dining
3. friendly, friends 4. held, was
5. walking 6. not, go
V. 1. How many cartons of milk do you need?
2. How much bread did you have for breakfast?
3. What did your uncle buy for you in the shop nearby?
4. How long does it take to walk to the supermarket?
5. Where does Neil live with his parents?
VI. 1. How much orange juice is there in the bottle? There is none.
2. Mother is making dinner in the kitchen. Can I take the message?
3. There is a swimming pool on the ground floor. Would you like to go there?
4. I will show you around my hometown.
5. I am afraid I can’t help you.
VII. 1-5 ACBDA 6-10 BCBDC
VIII. (A) CDABB (B) CACAB
综合练习 (B)
I. BABDD II. BBBDD
III. 1-5 BABDD 6-10 DAABC 11-15 CABAD
IV. 1. least, more 2. twenty-third
3. twentieth 4. is
5. to visit 6. to do
7. get, to enjoy
V. 1. takes / drives a car to 2. in, place like this
3. had, time 4. is no
5. Which boy is our monitor?
VI. 1. Simon sits in front of Millie. They both sit in the front of the classroom.
2. Yangsu is beautiful and quiet, but it rains a lot.
3. It rained until 10 o’clock p.m. yesterday.
4. The teacher said we didn’t have to finish the homework in class.
5. If you like works of art, this is a good place to go.
6. Most of them live in other areas of Beijing.
7. It took me 40 minutes to get to the museum yesterday.
VII. 1-5 ABABD 6-10 CBDDA
VIII. (A) ADDBC (B) CADCD
7B Unit 3-4
综合练习 (A)
I. BCBDA II. ACBAC
III. 1-5 AAACA 6-10 DCCCB 11-15 ABCBC
IV. 1. my, Mine 2. birth
3. the most dangerous 4. funny
5. your, mine 6. carefully
7. frogs 8. her
V. 1. 1) take 2) on 2. in the end
3. opened, with 4. What is he going to do next week?
5. How wonderful the game is!
VI. 1. We will meet in the park after school.
2. Is your mother cooking in the kitchen? No, she is leaning our bedroom.
3. Don’t be afraid. Follow me.
4. Some people sleep in the daytime while some people sleep at night.
5. He was surprised to look at us.
6. How beautiful the flowers are!
7. Take the second turning on the right.
8. We didn’t take the bus to the park yesterday.
VII. 1-5 ABCDA 6-10 BCDAD
VIII. (A) BADCD (B) TFTTT
综合练习 (B)
I. CCCAC II. DCCAB
III. 1-5 ABBDB 6-10 DAAAB 11-15 BBCBC
IV. 1. himself 2. easily
3. without 4. unusual
5. them 6. nearby
7. tastes, made 8. will go, doesn’t rain
V. 1. Does, belong to you 2. didn’t, until
3. isn’t anybody 4. What about, by train
5. How carefully the boy is listening to the teachers!
VI. 1. Please take turns to read the new words.
2. Do fish sleep with their eyes open?
3. The noise sounds like music.
4. The robber jumped out of the train and ran away.
5. Some people can live up to 100 years old.
6. How delicious the bread is!
7. How strong the boy looks!
VII. 1-5 BCADA 6-10 BABAD
VIII. (A) ACDAA (B) BCCDA
7B Unit 5-6
综合练习 (A)
I. ADBAC II. AAAAC
III. 1-5: ADCBA 6-10: ACBDD 11-15: ABCCC
IV. 1. buy 2. could not
3. smoke 4. meeting
5. friendly 6. seeing
7. are 8. not try
9. more quickly 10. writes, writer
V. 1. What did many visitors bring her?
2. How long does she have to stay in hospital?
3. Don’t pull the rabbit’s ears.
4. Give your rabbit clean water.
5. It took me 2 hours to do my homework last night.
VI. 1. Don’t feed meat to rabbits.
2. My cat weighs 3 kilos.
3. What happened to Wang Fang?
4. He put out the fire with water yesterday afternoon.
5. Thank you for saving my child.
6. He has to stay in hospital for 2 months. He is too weak.
7. We are looking forward to hearing from you.
8. Don’t frighten him. He is afraid of cats.
VII. 1-5: DCCAC 6-10: DBBDB
VIII. (A) CBBAB (B) BCDDA
综合练习 (B)
I. ACBDA II. DABCB
III. 1-5: DADCB 6-10: BBDAB 11-15: DCAAD
IV. 1. unhappy 2. unhelpful
3. theirs 4. visitors
5. gets 6. bite
7. to look after 8. be planted
9. toy bears 10. swam, swimming
V. 1. How did you put out the fire?
2. What may he do this evening?
3. I don’t think his dog is difficult to look after.
4. Don’t walk your dog every day.
5. Snakes have no ears.
VI. 1. An 8-year-old girl got lost on her way to school.
2. He was too young to stay at home alone.
3. It slept in an open drawer most of the time.
4. father told me not to read in the sun.
5. He is looking for his watch with eyes open wide in the bedroom.
6. Last year it often snowed in the USA, so they might go skiing.
7. He had a good memory when he was young.
8. In winter cats like sleeping on their owners’ laps.
VII. 1-5: CDDDA 6-10: ABBBB
VIII. (A) CBB (B) DC (C) ABDDC
8A Unit 1-3
综合练习（A）
I. C, D, A, A, B II. T, F, T, T, F
III. 1-5 B, B, D, B, C 6-10 A, B, B, D, C 11-16 A, B, A, B, D, B
IV. 1. beginning 2. preparing 3. final 4. more 5. received 6. boring 7. best 8. tasty
V. 1. possible 2. computers 3. information 4. matter 5. film 6. students
VI. 1. Millie is the prettiest girl among the four.
2. The new shirt makes him look very smart.
3. How often does Simon go to the Volleyball team?
4. When I saw the Golden Gate Bridge, I couldn’t believe my eyes.
5. We should cheer for our team
VII.1-5 C, A, B, A, D 6-10 B, A, C, B, B
VIII. (A) 1-3 F, T, T (B) 1-3 A, B, C (C) 1-4 C, A, A, C
IX. I have a good friend called Mary. She has short hair and looks very lovely. She is generous and helpful. She often gives seats to the elderly on the bus.
She also has a good sense of humour. When I am with her I always feel quite happy. She can
keep secrets for me and never says a bad word about others. I think she is a true friend.
综合练习（B）
I. A, D, B, D, C II. T, F, F, F, T
III. 1-5 D, A, B, D, C 6-10 C, D, B, D, A 11-16 B, C, B, C, C, B
IV. 1. secrets 2. best 3. willing 4. speaking 5. ideal 6. Unluckily 7. interest 8. preparing
V. 1. earth 2. mountains 3. salt 4. important 5. pollution 6.against
VI. 1. When the planes are taking off, the noise is really terrible.
2. My sister is interested in playing tennis, but she is not good at tennis.
3. Last week his father agreed to go horse-riding with them, and they had a great time.
4. I decide to buy myself an MP3 player next year.
5. It is easy for him to finish drawing a picture within five minutes.
VII. 1-5 A, C, D, B, A 6-10 B, B, C, D, A
VIII. (A) 1-3 D, C, B (B) 1-4 A, D, B, C
(C) 1. 1271 2. 41 years old 3. More than three and a half years
IX. My ideal school
I study in a mixed school. Every morning I go to school at 9a.m. and I go back home at 3p.m. My favourite subject is Home Economic. Before I came to this school I could do nothing for myself, nut now I can cook tasty and healthy food.
There is a reading week at school every year. We can read the books that we like. We all like the reading week very much.
After school we spend a lot of time playing baseball. Sometimes I can go shopping with my friends.
8A Unit 4-6
综合练习（A）
I. 1-5 D, G, E, B, C II. 1-5 A, C, D, B, D
III. 1-5 B, D, D, A, C 6-10 C, C, A, B, C 11-16 A, A, B, B, B, B
IV. 1. to drink 2. does; like 3. will; do 4. lost 5. sing 6. to eat 7. took 8. to hurt
V. 1. warn 2. danger 3. screaming 4. Once 5. Finally 6. yourself
VI. 1. Shall we share the bedroom?
2. Linda cannot run so fast as me.
3. Could you give me some advice on how to learn English?
4. We always have a great time talking with each other.
5. American English is quite different from British English.
VII. 1-5 D, B, C, A, A 6-10 C, B, B, A, C
VIII. (a)1-3 T, F, T (b) 1-3 B, B, D (c) 1-4 C, D, C, A
IX. My Best Friend
I have a best friend named Henry. Henry is a tall and handsome boy. Henry does well in his subjects. He is good at English. His spoken English is very fluent.
Henry likes sports very much. He likes playing football best. He is on our school football team. Beckham is his favourite football player. His dream is to be a famous football player.
Henry is very easygoing and friendly. He often helps others. I think I am lucky to be his friend.
综合练习(B)
I. A, C, B, D, D II. B, D, D, D, A
III. 1-5 D, D, B, B, A 6-10 B, A, C, A, C 11-16 C, B, A, B, B, C
IV. 1. fluently 2. leaves 3. dishonest 4. living 5. wore 6. leaves 7. trapped 8. lightning
V. 1. around 2. true 3. changed 4. safe 5. lonely 6. grown
VI. 1. Eddie is going birdwatching at the market tomorrow.
2. More and more birds are in danger because they don’t have enough space.
3. Some people do not understand the importance of protecting the environment.
4. Zhalong Nature Reserve is the ideal home for different kinds of wildlife.
5. My cousin is interested in ball games, including volleyball, basketball and so on.
VII. 1-5 D, A, B, C, D 6-10 B, C, A, B, A
VIII. (a)1-2 B, C (b)1-4 D, C, B, D (c) 1-4 C, B, D, C
IX. Zhalong is a nature reserve in Heilongjiang in north-east China. It is one of the world’s moat important wetlands. It provides food and shelter for the wildlife. But now people keep taking the land, so more and more birds are in danger. We must take action to protect them as soon as possible.
8B Unit 1-3
综合练习（A）
I. A, C, C, B, A II. C, B, A, D, B III. D, B, B, D, B
IV. 1-5: D A B C C 6-10: A A C A B 11-15: A A D A C
V. 1.arrive 2. is loved 3. sells 4. happened 5. was designed
6. printer, educational, designed, character, knowledge, correctly, earned, never, role , levels
VI. 1. What were you doing when your mother came home yesterday?
2. I have studied in Suzhou No.1 School for about 2 years.
3. Hello Kitty’s house is so beautiful that I want to live in it.
4. I used to travel to Europe.
5. Her dress matches well with her shoes.
VII. 1. have---has 2. city---cities 3. good---well 4. and---but 5. feet---foot
VIII. B A B D A D C A B D
IX. A) A B B A A B) D C A B D
综合练习(B)
I. C, C, B, C, A II. B, C, A, B, B III. C, B, B, C, B
IV. 1-5: C A A D B 6-10: B A A D B 11-15: C B A A C
V. 1. wakes 2. dance 3. taking 4. miss 5. to leave
6. crossing , children, listen, quickly, stops, know, safe, both, correct, lights
VI. 1. Since Eddie was born, it has lived with Millie.
2. Great changes have taken place in Suzhou Industry Park during the last ten years.
3. Spring is the best season to visit Chinese gardens.
4. I want to get some information about the package tours to Suzhou, Wuxi and Shanghai.
5. The Princess’ hair was cut short by the evil witch.
VII. 1. did---will 2. didn’t---not to 3. quiet---be quiet
4. not---don’t 5. to camping---camping
VIII. C A B B C C D D A A
IX. A) C B A C B B) D C B A B
X. Great changes have taken place in our school during these years. A new gem has been built and now all the teachers and students can do sports there, such as playing table tennis, basketball and badminton. There is also a new building in our school. It is a very beautiful building with red walls. There are six classrooms in it as well as a big meeting room. What is more, there are more and more books in the school library so we can find books almost on every subject there.
8B Unit 4-6
综合练习(A)
I. C, A, B, B ,A II. C, A, C, A, B III. B, B, A, C, B
IV. 1-5: A C C D D 6-10: A B A B C 11-15: A A D C D
V. 1. was talking 2. reading 3. to go 4. did/get
5. important, hold, aim, donate, charity, Project, donations, provide, chance, late
VI. 1. He used to do operations on two or three patients a day.
2. Patients don’t need to pay for the medical treatment.
3. I wish I were a bird.
4. The charity show will be held in ten days.
5. Bring your umbrella with you if necessary.
VII. 1. a---an 2. eat---eating 3. because of---because
4. so---because 5. knowledges---knowledge
VIII. D C A B C D A C B A
IX. A) D C D C C B) D B D B D
综合练习(B)
I. C, B, A, B, C II. B, C, A, B, C III. C, B, C, A, B
IV. 1-5: A A B B D 6-10: A B C C D 11-15: A D B D B
V. 1. organizer 2. running 3. passed 4. volunteers 5. going
6. clever, already, seriously, even, hired, through, blind, grew, famous, encouraged
VI. 1. I work so hard because I hope this show will be a great success.
2. It is important to take the medicine three times a day.
3. There was a flood because of the heavy rain.
4. It is interesting for him to join in the writing club.
5. Mother tells me that pollution is a big problem in many areas in the world.
VII. 1. starts---started 2. to ask---asking 3. I---me 4. a---an 5. exciting---excited
VIII. B A B C A C B D D A
IX. A) C B D A C B) B B B C D
X. ORBIS was set up to help the blind people all over the world, especially in poor countries. It uses a flying eye hospital to travel to those countries and do operations on the blind patients. Also,
it trains local doctors and nurses there. The doctors and nurses in ORBIS are all volunteers. So ORBIS is a charity organization.
9B Unit 1-4
综合练习（A）
Ⅰ. BBBCC Ⅱ. BCADB
Ⅲ. 1---5: ABCDC 6---10: CDABA 11---15: ACBDD
IV. 1. repaired 2. have taken 3.difficulty easily 4. yourselves
V. 1. Many trees are planted on the hill every spring.
2. They want to know if you like playing football.
3. How popular the football players are!
What popular football players they are!
4. I found it difficult to do the sum.
5. can he
VI.1. playing 2. quietly 3. teeth 4. heavier 5. twentieth
6. quarters / fourths 7. such 8. cheaper 9. youngest 10. without
VII.1. In order to see my favourite pop music star, I waited for a whole night outside the hotel.
2. It is said that he joined the navy at the age of 14.
3. This is the pen you want.
4. When there is some extra work to do, the robot will do it while you are asleep.
5. In the past, the emperors used to spend their summers here.
VIII. 1---5 C D A C B 6---10 DACDB
IX. 1---5D A B DC 6---10 BADBC
X.略
综合练习（B）
Ⅰ. CACAC Ⅱ. BBACC III. BCCCA
IV. 1---5: ACDCC 6---10: DBDBD 11---15: BBDAC
V. 1. best 2. to fall 3. shelves 4. millions 5. would be
VI. 1. The teacher told me not to use a dictionary when I meet new words.
2. Your bike mustn’t be put in the corner.
3. Which man is one of Tom’s friends?
4. It is seven years since my aunt went to Shenzhen.
5. How often are the Olympic Games held?
Ⅶ. 1. I think the toy that was made in Japan is very interesting.
2. Tian’anmen Square is the biggest square in the world and is always filled with tourists.
3. Despite missing their home country, the American students enjoyed their stay very much.
4. Do you know how to make the baby stop crying?
5. Korean is too difficult to learn.
VIII. 1---5 D C AD C 6---10 B A C BC
Ⅸ. 1---5 CABAD 6---10 CABBD
X.略
相关文档
- 2017中考数学专题训练七统计与概率2021-05-105页
- 中考英语 第三轮 中考题型聚焦 考2021-05-104页
- 龙东地区2013年中考数学卷2021-05-1025页
- 2016年河北省中考物理试卷2021-05-1021页
- 2020中考化学真题分类汇编 3考点152021-05-103页
- 广东省数学中考试卷含答案word完美2021-05-1012页
- 2019年山东省潍坊市中考数学试卷2021-05-1029页
- 陕西中考数学试题及答案word版2021-05-1012页
- 2008年广东省东莞市中考数学考试2021-05-109页
- 中考物理试题分类汇编—运动和力二2021-05-1044页
微信/支付宝扫码支付下载